Home

ADV50, User Manual (sw V1.11)

1. 3 4 15 Niro WR ug ADb1 02 BAUD N 5 2 2 n 16 m t 1 72 2 2 84 35 8 1 41 3 5 0 14 UNIT mm inch ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 23 Appendix B Accessories B 9 1 2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for details ooo y 250K 00 500K Cav BAUD ADD1 Switch Baud zee Value Rate ise Gi Reserved 0 125K S Reserved 1 250K v can EP v 2 500K Other AUTO MAC audios DAIS nate Setting baud rate Setting MAC addresses 125K use decimal system B 9 1 3 Mounting Method Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto ADV50 The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference Dimensions STEP 2 agen woga mopa Tus E UNIT mm inch ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 9 1 4 Power Supply No external power is needed Power is supplied via RS 485 port that is connected to ADV50 An 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with this communication module is used to connect the RS 485 port between ADV50 and this communication module for power This communication module will p
2. Wo 52 Frame Power Terminals Torque Wire Wire type R L1 S L2 T L3 A 14kgf cm 12 14 AWG Copper only 75 C viT2 wra 2 59 3 3 2 1mm R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 WIT3 18kgf cm 8 18 AWG B 15 6in Ibf 8 4 0 8mm Copper only 75 C B1 B2 R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 30kgf cm 8 16 AWG c 26in Ibf 8 4 1 3mm Copper only 75 C B1 B2 2 14 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring fru Frame A ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 4F ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F Frame B ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 4F Frame ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3110 XBX 4F For frame To connect 6 AWG 13 3 wires use Recognized Ring Terminals 2 4 Control Terminals Circuit diagram for digital in
3. DSP 401 DSP 404 DSP XXX OSI Layer 7 Application Communication Profile DS 301 OSI Layer 2 Data Link Layer CAN Controller CAN 2 0A e E OSI Layer 1 Physical Layer ISO 11898 e CAN bus ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 2 D 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition Appendix D CANopen Function 8 1 8 1 socket plug PIN Signal Description 1 CAN H CAN H bus line dominant high 2 CAN L CAN L bus line dominant low 3 CAN GND Ground OV V 4 SG 485 communication 5 SG 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground OV V D 1 3 Pre Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme The 11 bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows COB Identifier CAN Identifier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function Code Node Number Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index Broadcast messages NMT 0000 z 0 SYNC 0001 0x80 0x1005 0x1006 0x1007 TIME STAMP 0010 0x100 0 1012 0x1013 Point to point messages Emergency 0001 1 127 0x81 OxFF 0 1014 0x1015 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 C
4. D 7 0 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object D 9 0 2 How to Control by D 13 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation In order to retain the warranty coverage the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time Storage conditions are NS Store in a clean dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes Store within an ambient temperature range of 20 C to 60 C Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA DO NOT place on the ground directly It should be stored properly Moreover if the surrounding environment is humid you should put desicant dryer packet s in the package DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature It may cause condensation and frost If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months the temperature should not be higher than 30 C Storage longer than one year is not recommended it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or
5. MOV 10 DO x1 MOV TO 010 API Mnemonic Operands Function 15 BMOV P Block Move Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps H KnY KnM T D BMOV BMOVP 7 steps D Operands S Start of source devices D Start of destination devices n Number of data to be moved Explanations 1 Range of n 1 512 2 Seethe specifications of each model for their range of use 3 contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to registers starting from the device designated by D If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used Program Example 1 When X10 On the contents in registers DO D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 D23 X10 H cenov DO D20 K4 n 4 Program Example 2 Assume the bit devices KnX KnY KnM and are designated for moving the number of digits of and D has to be the same i e their n has to be the same ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 50 Program Example 3 M1000 H po 20 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function MO YO M1 Y1 M2 4 Y4 5 Y5 Me Y6 M7 Y7 M8 Y10 M9 Y11 M10 Y12 M11
6. B 16 7 0 isch de Dd e ede RC I ene d B 17 B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KB ADV50 B 17 B 7 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad B 19 B 7 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital B 8 Extension 21 B 8 1 Relay Card ice dne deer edente B 21 B 82 Digital V O soc scenes sien eet B 22 B 8 3 Analog Card sse B 22 B 8 4 Communication Card sss B 22 8 5 Speed Feedback B 23 B 9 Fieldb s Module Sisi 9 UI eei ete e ette B 23 B 9 1 DeviceNet Communication Module EXP DN ADV20 50 B 23 B 9 1 1 Panel Appearance and B 23 B 9 1 2 Wiring and Settings ssem B 24 B 9 1 3 Mounting Method B 24 B 9 1 4 Power Supply nette ette ies B 25 B 9 1 5 LEDs B 25 B 9 2 LonWorks Communication Module EXP LWK ADV20 50 B 25 B 9 2 1 Introduction citet ceo te Petr iet otn B 25 B 9 2 2 DIMENSIONS ie ette B 26 B 9 2 3 Specifications ssssseeeee e B 26 B 09 2 AWN pe ec rosis B 26
7. C 29 5 Gommands 3 2 dne heri C 29 C 5 1 Basic 1 29 C 5 2 Output Commands sse eene C 30 C 5 3 Timer and Counters sssssseeee eee eee C 30 C 5 4 Main Control Commands seen C 30 C 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Commands of Contact C 30 C 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands C 31 C 5 7 Command ence eres C 31 C 5 8 Explanation for the C 31 C 5 9 Description of the Application Commands C 46 C 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands C 47 C 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive C 59 C 6 Error Code ri e wee EE ee Ee es C 65 Appendix D CANopen Function nnns D 1 D1 OV rview as e e PA es D 2 0 1 1 CANopen Protocol eene D 2 0 1 2 RJ 45 Pin Definition D 3 0 1 3 Pre Defined Connection D 3 0 1 4 CANopen Communication D 4 0 1 4 1 Network Management D 4 0 1 4 2 SDO Service Data D 6 0 1 4 3 PDO Process Data
8. Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters For continuous and The AC motor drive can be 08 15 08 16 Air conditioners reliable operation di icall 10 remote pumps without operator restarte reset automatically up to intervention times after a fault occurs Emergency Stop by DC Braking d Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters AC motor drive can use DC braking 08 00 Emergency stop for emergency stop when quick stop is 08 02 High speed rotors without brake needed without brake resistor When 08 03 resistor used often take motor cooling into consideration Over torque Setting Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The over torque detection level can be 06 00 06 05 To protect set Once OC stall OV stall and over Pumps fans and machines and to torque occurs the output frequency extruders have continuous will be adjusted automatically It is reliable operation suitable for machines like fans and P pumps that require continuous operation Upper Lower Limit Frequency Tu Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Control the motor When user cannot provide 01 07 Pump and fan speed within upper lower limit gain or bias from 01 08 upper lower limit external signal it can be set PP individually in AC motor drive Skip Frequency Setting Penis Y Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The AC motor drive cannot run at 08 09 08 14 To prevent con
9. Factory setting i p MIT MOT Factory setting NPN Mode 0 O MI2 v Drive is in operation Me Factory us 5 gt 48V50mA Max setting 5 0 A Multi function P MCMY Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure 7 5 5 for wiring of NPN am n mode and PNP mm E 5 0O Mle Analog Mui t netion Output al nal Common dou mode EL 9 DCM factory setting Analog freq EQ current meter 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency 10V Power supply RS 485 serial interface Factory setting i 10V 20mA a 2 oari 1 Reserved i i Master Frequency 2 EV gt 1 0to 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI ap ACI 4 SG ACI AVI switch i i 4 20mA 0 10V 5 SG When switching to AVI CY ACM act 6 Reserved it indicates AVI2 Reserved Analog Signal Common Q EG Reserved Main circuit power terminals O Control circuit terminals Shielded leads amp Cable ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 for models of ADV50 Series ADV50 1004 XXX 4F ADV50 1007 XXX 2T 4F ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F braking resistor i optional i braking unit optional Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker Motor R L1 6__ U T1 O S L2 V T2
10. Odd Stop i parity bit 8 6 character 11 bit character frame p 4 8 bit character ___ 10 bit character frame 8 2 Start Even Stop Stop 18 gt 6 parity bit 4 8 bit character _ __ 12 bit character frame gt 8 0 2 Odd Stop Stop 4 3 4 2 6 7 parity bit bit 8 character i 12 bitcharacter frame gt 3 Communication Protocol 3 1 Communication Data Frame ASCII mode STX Start character Address Hi Communication address Address Lo 8 bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Command code Function Lo 8 bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA n 1 Contents of data to Nx8 bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes DATA 0 n lt 20 maximum of 40 ASCII codes 4 116 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum LRC CHK Lo 8 bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi End characters END Lo END1 CR 0DH ENDO LF 0AH RTU mode START A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address Communication address 8 bit address Function Command code 8 bit command DATA n 1 Contents of data to nx8 bit data n lt 40
11. Operands Function 24 INC P D Increment Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnX KnY T D INC INCP steps D a lle lle fe Operands D Destination device Explanations 1 If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will plus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 55 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function 2 instruction adopts pulse execution instructions INCP 3 In 16 bit operation 32 767 pluses 1 and obtains 32 768 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 647 pluses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 648 Program Example When goes from Off to On the content in DO pluses 1 automatically Hi Mnemonic Operands Function 25 DEC D Decrement Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps op X Y KnX KnY KnM T D DEC DECP steps D o le la e Operands D Destination Explanations 1r If the instruction is not a pulse execution one the content in the designated device D will minus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions In 16 bit operation 32 768 minuses 1 and obtains 32 767 In 32 bit operation 2 147 483 648 minuses 1 and obtains 2 147 483 647 Prog
12. A phase PULSE Cm cw GENERATOR B phase 1301 PG Pulse Range Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20000 Factory Setting 600 Ea A Pulse Generator PG is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor speed This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control Motor Pole Number Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Ea The pole number should be even can t be odd ETE M Proportional Gain P Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain P and is used for speed control with PG feedback ETE A Integral Gain 1 Unit 0 01 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 149 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 00 to 100 00 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable This parameter specifies integral control and associated gain 1 and is used for speed control with PG feedback ETE X Speed Control Output Frequency Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 00Hz Factory Setting 10 00 Ea This parameter limits the amount of correction by the PI control on the output frequency when controlling speed via PG feedback It can limit the maximum output frequency output frequency Frequency command Speed detection ETE A Speed Feedback Display Filter Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 500 When 0 04 is s
13. X10 H cmp YO Y1 Y2 If K102D10 YO On If K102D10 1 On If K10 D10 Y2 On 4 To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction X10 X10 ZRST MO M2 API Mnemonic Operands Function 11 ZCP P S S S D Zone Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY KnM D ZCP ZCPP 9 steps 8 aol S2 x Operands 1 Lower bound of zone comparison 52 Upper bound of zone comparison S Comparison value D Comparison result Explanations 1 The content 51 should be smaller than the content 2 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use is compared with its 1 2 and the result is stored When 1 gt 2 the instruction performs comparison by using 1 as the lower upper bound ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 48 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function 6 two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction or b31 1 in 32 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 Designate device MO and operand automatically occupies MO 1 2 2 When On ZCP instruction wi
14. reir rende re eden 3 2 3 9 TRIAL RUM cic ener E 3 3 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings seen 4 2 4 2 Parameter Settings for 4 32 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings 4 37 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 1 5 1 Over Current OC Ine 5 21 5 2 Ground Fault 5 2 5 3 Over Voltage eden reete aie crees 5 2 5 4 Low Voltage 5 3 5 5 Over Heat OH er eret mei 5 4 5 6 Overload Eee e tea 5 4 5 7 Keypad Display is 5 5 5 8 Phas Loss PHL ste iioii en e teet eno Cni ge 5 5 5 9 Motor cannot ie te Pee d ends 5 6 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed 5 7 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration 5 8 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected 5 8 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise 5 9 5 14 Environmental Condition eee 5 9 5 15 Affecting Other Machines sese 5 10 Ch
15. Europe America UL Model Input Output gR 1 ADV50 1007 XXX 2T 51 4 2 8 10 JJN 10 ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 6 5 2 5 10 15 JJN 15 ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 9 7 5 16 20 JJN 20 ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 9 7 4 2 ADV50 2022 XBX 2T 15 11 2b 30 JJN 30 ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF 15 7 7 5 ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 20 6 17 32 40 JJN 40 ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 24 11 40 50 JJN 50 ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 26 25 ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 34 33 50 60 JJN 60 ADV50 1004 XXX 4F 1 9 1 5 6 5 JJS 6 ADV50 1007 XXX 4F 3 2 25 ADV50 1015 XXX 4F 4 3 4 2 8 10 448 10 ADV50 2022 XBX 4F 7 1 5 5 12 15 JJS 15 ADV50 2037 XBX 4F 11 2 8 2 20 20 JJS 20 ADV50 3055 XBX 4F 14 13 25 30 JJS 30 ADV50 3075 XBX 4F 19 18 32 40 JJS 40 ADV50 3110 XBX 4F 26 24 40 50 JJS 50 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 7 Appendix B Accessories B 4 AC Reactor B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V 50 60Hz 1 Phase kW HP Fundamental Max continuous Inductance Amps Amps 3 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 6 6 5 0 4 1 2 5 7 5 3 0 75 1 8 12 1 5 1 5 2 18 1 25 2 2 3 18 27 0 8 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kW HP ias cela ps Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 7 5 3 7 5 8 12 3 5 5 5 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 TS 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 15 20 35 52 5 0 8 1 2 B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 230V
16. Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 5 4 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display Yes v Cycle power to AC motor drive Fix connector and eliminate noise v Display normal No Check if all connectors are connect correctly and no noise is present Yes k v AC motor drive works normally AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact Gefran 5 8 Phase Loss PHL Phase loss Check wiring at R S and T terminals correct wiring Yes No Tighten all screws Check if the screws of terminals tightened gt gt 9 yes Check if the input voltage of R S T is unbalanced BER Please check the wiring 9 prm and power system for abnormal power Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact Gefran ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 5 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 9 Motor cannot Run Motor cannot run gt Check KB ADV50 for normal display Yes Yes Check if there is any Reset after clearing fault code displayed fault and then RUN Check if non fuse breaker and magnetic contactor are ON No Set them to ON Check if any faults occur such as Lv PHL or disconnec
17. When 02 07 is set to 2 increase decrease the frequency by 02 08 m Ca When Pr 02 07 is set to 3 increase decrease the frequency by Pr 02 08 unit pulse input PD X Keypad Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command Communication Frequency Command Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Ea This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad amp Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only This parameter is used to save keypad RS 485 frequency command EN Initial Frequency Selection for keypad amp RS485 USB Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop 02 15 Initial Frequency Setpoint for keypad amp RS485 USB Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop When setting Pr 02 14 to 0 the initial frequency will be current frequency When setting Pr 02 14 to 1 the initial frequency will be 0 When setting Pr 02 14 to 2 the initial frequency will be Pr 02 15
18. ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 35 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Explanations To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result the result operation pointer pluses 1 Mnemonic Function MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the pointer of operation result doesn t move Mnemonic Function MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register the stack pointer will decrease 1 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact of 7 X1 I C n MPS Save in stack 2 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MRD Read from the stack without moving pointer AND X2 Connect to contact A of X2 in series OUT MO Drive MO coil MPP Read from the stack OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil END End program Mnemonic Function ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 36 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function INV Inverting Operation Operand None Explanations Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation HH Load A contact of Inverting the
19. X Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Windmill winding Restart free Before the free running motor is 08 04 08 08 machine fan and running motor completely stopped it can be restarted inertia loads without detection of motor speed The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed DC Braking before Running NP Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When e g windmills Keep the free If the running direction of the free 08 00 fans and pumps rotate running motor at running motor is not steady please 08 01 freely by wind or flow standstill execute DC braking before start up without applying power Energy Saving Applications Purpose Functions P s Punching machines Energy saving and Energy saving when the AC motor 08 17 fans pumps and less vibrations drive runs at constant speed yet full precision machinery power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations Multi step Operation Applications Purpose Functions opcm Conveying machinery operation by To control 15 step speeds and duration 04 05 04 08 ying y multi step speeds by simple contact signals 05 00 05 14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Purpose Functions Moni Switching 01 09 01 12 Auto turntable for acceleration and When an AC motor drive drives two or 04 05 04 08 conveying machinery
20. Analog Signal ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode 4 AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V 12 02 Min AVI3 Input 0 0 to 10 0V Voltage 120 Percentage 0 010 100 0 poof Percentage 1204 AVI3 Input 0 0 to 10 0v 10 0 Voltage Max AVI3 Scale 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 E 20 f Current 1207 Percentage 0 010 100 0 poof Percentage 4 28 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory roe Settings Setting pustomer 12 08 Max ACI2 Input 0 0 to 20 0mA 20 0 Current 1209 ACI2 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 Percentage Disabled Source of the 1st frequency Al2 Function Source of the 2nd frequency Selection PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback P Analog Signal 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA Mode 1 AVI4 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Min AVI4 Input 1242 cane 0 0 to 10 0V 19 13 Min AVIS Seale 0 0 to 100 0 Percentage 12 144 Max AVI4 Input 0 0 to 10 0V 10 0 Voltage 12 15 Max AVI4 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 Percentage 12 16 Min ACIS Input 0 0 to 20 0mA 4 0 Current Min ACI3 Scale 12 18 Max Input 9 9 to 20 0mA Current 1249 Scale 9 9 to 100 0 100 0 mE Percentage 0 AVO1 AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO1 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO1 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA AO1 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1
21. The explanation of command order 1 LD 2 OR MO 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 11 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD TO AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR TO K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1 LD LDI command give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising edge or falling edge when contact is ON as shown in the following Rising ed ising edge Falling edge gt 14 Time 41 E Time OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 2 ANI command single device connects to a device or a block in series AND command AND command r I peu The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 3 ORI command single device connects to a device or a block CPU uut x ORcommand command OR command ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 12 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising edge or falling edge 4 5 ANB command a block connects to a device or a block in series ANB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB they should be combined to blocks or network from up to dow
22. RUAAR Re srce z Set bet bed F Ak A 4 4 wi 2 me wi G wr we 4 i i 11 4 T ws as LIO i it it m 4 tH 4 4 4 Hit c e Been 52 mit C 2 4 Program Input C 2 5 Program Download Please do following steps for program download Step 1 Press button for compiler after inputting program in Soft PLC ADV50 Step 2 After finishing compiler choose the item Write to PLC in the communication items After finishing Step 2 the program will be downloaded from Soft PLC ADV50 to the AC motor drive by the communication format ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 2 6 Program Monitor If you execute start monitor in the communication item during executing PLC the ladder diagram will be shown as follows M1000 B Ee E aa Yo T2 K10 K5 RST T2 D C 2 7 The Limit of PLC The protocol of PLC is 7 E 1 Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload download The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ WPR When setting P 00 04 to 2 the display will be the value in PLC register D1043 A 0 999 display PONS B 10
23. amp Sensorless Vector AC Drive 0 4 to 11 kW 230 Vac 1ph 230 460 Vac 3ph SIEIDrive User manual GEFRAN GEFRAN Drive amp Motion Control Unit Technology control Vif amp Sensorless Vector Vector Field Oriented Controllo Vettoriale Orientam di Flusso Model Modello Specifications Specifiche Power 0 5 5 Hp 0 5 15 Hp 1 60 Hp Potenza 0 4 3 7 0 4 11 KW 0 75 45 kW 100 120 Vac 1ph 200 240 Vac 1ph 2 tage 200 240 Vac 1ph 200 240 3ph 400 480 Vac 3ph ensione 380 480 Vac 3ph 380 480 Vac 3ph Speed regulation accuracy 0 596 0 02 with dig encoder on 0 0j Regolazione di velocit 0 5 0 5 0 02 con encoder dig 0 01 Rated motor speed 4 precisione Analog inputs 1 voltage or current 2 1 current 1 voltage 2 bipolar current voltage Ingressi analogici 1 in tensione o corrente 2 1 corrente 1 in tens 2 bipolari corrente in tens Analog outputs 1 voltage 1 voltage 2 1 voltage or current 1 voltage Uscite analogiche 1 tensione 1 tensione 2 1 in tens o corrente 1 in tens Digital inputs 6 6 6 Ingressi digitali Digital outputs 1 relay 2 1 static and 1 relay 4 2 static and 2 relays Uscite digitali 1 rel 2 1 statica e 1 a rel 4 2 statiche e 2 a rel RS 485 RJ 45 with Modbus RS 485 RJ 45 with Mod RS485 3 protocol 3 bus p
24. deceleration times by external signal more motors it can reach high speed but still start and stop smoothly 4 32 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Overheat Warning Chapter 4 Parameters Applications Purpose Functions When AC motor drive overheats it 03 00 03 01 Air conditioner Safety measure uses a thermal sensor to have 04 05 04 08 overheat warning Two wire three wire Applications Purpose Functions p FWD STOP 66 MI1 OPEN STOP 02 00 CLOSE FWD 02 01 REV STOP poo CLOSE REV 02 09 DeM 04 04 RUN STOP MI1 OPEN STOP To run stop CLOSE RUN FWD REV s5o 2 FWD General application forward ang COLOSESREV reverse by external DCM terminals 3 wire STOP RUN _ ob MI1 CLOSE RUN MI3 OPEN STOP 4 6e 4 MI2 OPEN FWD REV FWD CLOSE REV DCM Operation Command Applications Purpose Functions Poet Selecting the Selection of AC motor drive control by 02 01 General application source of control external terminals digital keypad or 04 05 04 08 signal RS485 Frequency Hold Applications Purpose Functions Siene Acceleration Hold output frequency during 04 05 04 08 General application deceleration pause Acceleration deceleration ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 33 Chapter 4 Parameters Auto Restart after Fault
25. 4 60 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Display the Master Freq Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting E You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit021 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 2 1 1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 4 Bit2 1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi input function 8 1 Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command P Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting You can read the operation source by this parameter Display Value Bit Function 1 Bit021 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit121 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2 1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3 1 Operation Command Source by Multi input function 16 Bit4 1 Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 61 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 3 Output Function Parameters ETE Multi function Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Factory Setting 8 Multi function Output Terminal MO1 Factory Setting 1 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is ON T Master Frequency Active when the AC m
26. A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On If the operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example In 16 bit BIN subtraction When On the content in DO will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in SUB DO D10 020 D20 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 53 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 22 MUL S4 2 D Multiplication Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY KnM T C MUL DMULP 7 steps 8 aol a lels S2 x gt Operands S1 Multiplicand 2 Multiplicator D Product Explanations 1 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction multiplies 1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S1 S2 and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit command 1 5 X b15 is a symbol bit b15is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b15 of 0 1 Symbol bit 0 refers to a positive value Symbol bit 1 refers to a negative value When D serves as a bit device it can designate K1 K4 and construct a 16 bit result occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16 bit dat
27. Model Number Status Display Display the driver s current status data such as Master Frequency Left Key Move cursor to the left FWD REV Key MODE Change between different display mode _ PU Key n Switch th t d operation command source L Right key l Move the cursor to the right FWD PROG DATA PROG DATA Used to enter programming parameters Select FWD REV operation STOE STOP RESET RUN SET Stops drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred 8 cic RUN Key Start AC drive operation B 6 2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message Descriptions ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U V and W The custom unit u The output current present at terminals U V and W Press A to change the mode to READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad KB ADV20 50 It can read 4 groups of parameters to KB ADV20 50 read 0 read 3 Press A to change the mode to SAVE Press PROG DATA for about 2 sec or until it s flashing then write the parameters from the digital keypad KB ADV20 50 to AC drive If it has saved it will show the type of AC motor drive Appendix B Accessories Display Message Description
28. T ORF Falling edge detection parallel connection X T ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 C 5 6 Rising edge falling edge Output Commands Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Commands Function Operands PLS Rising edge output Y M PLF Falling edge output Y M C 5 7 End Command Command Function Operands END Program end none C 5 8 Explanation for the Commands Mnemonic Function LD Load A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y P Explanations The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 LD Load contact A of H lt gt 1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDI Load B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y C 31 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Explanations The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit Function of the command is to save present contents and at the
29. T L3 W T3 Figure 2 For frame ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 4F For frame C ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3110 XBX 4F Braking Resistor Optional BR BUE Non fuse breaker O NFB 81 B2 R m R L1 U T1 O S 4 y j S L2 V T2 To O T L3 w T3 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R L1 S L2 T L3 AC line input terminals 1 phase 3 phase U T1 V T2 W T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3 phase induction motor B1 B2 Connections for Brake resistor optional B1 Connections for External Brake unit BU 2 4 ADV20 50 series Earth connection please comply with local regulations Mains power terminals R L1 5 2 T L3 W Connect these terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 via a non fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3 phase AC power some models to 1 phase AC power for circuit protection It is unnecessary to consider phase sequence W t is recommended power quickly and to add a magnetic contactor MC in the power input wiring to cut off reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives Both e
30. le jesTor FWDe REV e le Descriptions Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter External Fault Display End for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing E Enter key After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the A and v keys Display Err if the input is invalid gt When the setting exceeds 99 99 for those numbers with 2 decimals i e unit is 0 01 it will only display 1 decimal due to 4 digital display ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 18 Appendix B Accessories B 7 2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad ara WED Fr i mg GO START NOTE In the selected mode press to set the parameters HEM BERE gt CEE gt METTI ES lt mir Success to Input data error set parameter NOTE In the parameter setting mode you can press 1 to the selected mode Setting PLC Mode unn gt unn mI IDE PLC2 mode active rr Em gt EHE PLC1 mode active ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 19 Appendix B Accessories B 7 3 Reference Table for the 7 segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 LED ri 2 Display L i 2 4 2 English alp
31. Brake unit Module User Manual for further details Applicable Full Equivalent Brake Unit Brake Min Equivalent S Motor 3 Load Part No Brake Resistors Part Resistor Value AC Drive Part No Resistor Value Torque o Torque recommended and No and Quantity 10 ED for each AC gt hp kW KG M Quantity Motor Drive 0 5 0 4 ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 0216 2201 2500 802 1 Rrz20r250R 1 170 1000 1 0 75 ADV50 1007200 2MF 2T 0 427 220W 1500 PU 1 RF220T150R 1 143 800 ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF 300 W 1000 o RF300DT 1008 1 107 400 2 15 0 849 BU 2 ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 300 W 1000 1 RF300DT 100R 1 107 800 3 a z 3 22 apvso 2022 xBx 2 F 2T 1 262 300 w 680 RF300DT68R 1 120 400 e s 37 ADVS0 3037 XBX 2T 2 080 750 W 450 1 85 400 75 55 ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 3 111 750 W 380 o is d 1 76 340 7 5 ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4 148 750 W 26 1 85 240 0 5 0 4 ADV50 1004 XXX 4F 0 216 300 4000 84 1 1 428 4000 1 0 75 50 1007 4 0 427 300w 4000 84 400r 1 214 2000 2 15 ADV50 1015 XXx 4F 0 849 2000 U 1 2008 1 143 1600 x S 3 22 ADVS0 2022 XBX 4F 1262 300 W 1500 o 3000 1508 1 1400 N 2 5 37 ADV50 2037 XBX 4F 2 080 750 w 1000 o eril 1 129 960 e 75 55 ADV50 305
32. C 3 C 2 3 Soft PLC ADV50 Installation C 4 C 2 4 Program oai cote C 5 C 2 5 Program 5 C 2 6 Program Monitor esse eene C 6 C 2 7 The Limit of PLC eee ee E ER ee s C 6 C3 Ladder Diagram teet reme de C 8 C 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram C 8 Introduction iioii irri o Presa rra c bz C 8 C 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder C 11 C 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program C 14 C4 PLC DeViceS i nura ree et iir en ed C 19 C 4 1 Summary of ADV50 PLC Device C 19 C 4 2 Devices Functions emen C 20 C 4 3 Value Constant H e C 21 C 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary C 22 C 4 5 The Function of Timer seee C 23 C 4 6 The Features and Functions of C 24 4 7 Register Types C 25 C 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays C 26 4 9 Special Registers oreet idet C 27 C 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode C 28 C 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2
33. Chapter 4 Parameters RTU mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two 4 bit hexadecimal characters For example 64 Hex 2 Data Format 10 bit character frame For ASCII 7 N 2 Stop Stop 8 t bit 7 bit character 10 bit character frame 7B 1 11213 4 5 6 Een Stop i i i parity bit 7 bit character 10 bit character frame p 7 0 1 i Stop 01112134 6 mid i i i i i parity bit 4 7 bit character 10 bit character frame 7 N 1 Start Stop bit 0 1234 5 6 7 bit character _ 9 bit character frame Even Stop Stop parity bit 7 bit character 11 bitcharacter frame 7 0 2 pto j Odd Stop Stop parity bit bit 7 bit character lt 11 bit character frame ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 115 Chapter 4 Parameters 11 bit character frame For RTU Stop Stop 0123 4 516 7 pi 4 8 bit character _ 11 bit character frame gt Even Stop parity bit PIS eg 4 4 8 bit character _ _ 11 bit character frame
34. No braking resistor is built in the ADV50 series it can install braking resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start stop Refer to Appendix B for details ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 11 Multiple ADV50 units can be installed in one location All the units should be grounded directly to ground terminal as shown in the figure below Ensure there are no ground loops a Good X Not allowed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 2 External Wiring Power Supply FUSE NFB Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor Zero phase Reactor EMI Filter gunit R L1 S L2 BUE Brakin Zero phase Reactor Line Reactor 2 10 Items Explanations Power Please follow the specific power 55 supply requirements shown Appendix There be inrush current during power up Please check the bahia chart of Appendix B and select the Optional correct fuse with rated current Use of an NFB is optional Maanetic Please do not use a Magnetic contactor as the I O switch of the AC Optional motor drive as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the drive Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching ee io
35. Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD x1 Load contact A of XO ORI x1 Connect to contact B of X1 X1 in parallel OUT 1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANB Series connection Multiple Circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the ANB calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 34 Program Example Ladder diagram Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Command code Operation i CY LD Load contact A of XO x2 ORI X2 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Block A Block B LDI 1 Load contact B of X1 OR Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel ANB Connect circuit block in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORB Parallel connection Multiple circuits Operand None Explanations To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x1 BlockA LD Load contact A of n ua Cn ANI 1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series ORB Block B LDI 2 Load contact of X2 AND Connect to contact A of X3 in series ORB Connect circuit block in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None
36. 0x60400010 0x6040 0 0 Control word 0x2211 R W 2Bytes Slave returns message to Master PDO1 a a CAN L a PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 OxF3 0x00 ndex ASub Definition Value R W Size 0x60410010 PDO1 Map x 0 6041 0 Status Word 0xF3 R W U16 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 1 4 4 EMCY Emergency Object Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following Appendix D CANopen Function Byte 0 1 2 3 Content Emergency Error Error register Code Object 1001H Manufacturer specific Error Field Definition of Emergency Object Controller T CANopen hs in Display Error Description Error Code Code RIN bit 0 7 0001H Over current 7400H 1 0002H Over voltage 7400H 2 oH i 0003H Overheating 4310H 3 0005H Overload 2310H 1 oL 0006H Overload 1 7120H 1 at e 0007H Overload 2 2310H 1 0008H External Fault 9000H 7 0009H during acceleration 2310H 1 acd 000AH Over current during deceleration 2310H 1 ocn 000BH Over current during constant speed 2310H 1
37. ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 38 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Explanations When the RST command is driven motion of its specific device is as follows Device Status Y M Coil and contact will be set to OFF Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0 and the coil and contact will be set to OFF D The content value will be set to 0 Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation H LD Load contact A of RST Y5 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function TMR 16 bit timer T K T0 T15 KO K32 767 Operand T D TO T15 00 029 Explanations When TMR command is executed the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count When the setting value of timer is attained counting value gt setting value the contact will be as following NO Normally Open contact Open collector NC Normally Closed contact Close collector Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of X0 T5 timer d TMR T5K1000 Setting is K1000 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 39 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function CNT 16 bit counter C K 0 7 K0 K32 767 Operand C D C0 C7 00 029 Explanations 1 When the CNT command is executed from OFF gt ON which means that the counter coil is driven and 1 should thus be added to the co
38. CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 02 05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 2 Disable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed Ea This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command Source is changed Pr 02 05 Start lockout Run when power is ON Operation statuswhen operation command source is changed 0 Disable AC motor drive will run Keep previous status 1 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run Keep previous status 2 Disable AC motor drive will run Change according to the new operation command source 3 Enable AC motor drive doesn t run Change according to the new operation command source En When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON MI1 MI2 DCM closed the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 after power is applied For terminals and MI2 gt 1 When Pr 02 05 is set to 0 or 2 AC motor drive will run immediately 2 When Pr 02 05 is set to 1 or 3 AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operati
39. CTL V2 11 4 19 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07 14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level 0 1 10 0V 24 07 15 Overheat Warning Level 0 1 10 0V 1 2 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level 0 1 5 0V 0 6 07 17 Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running 07 18 Motor Rated Current Motor 1 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA 07 19 Motor No Load Current Motor 1 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA M 07 20 Torque Compensation Motor 1 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 M 07 21 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 07 22 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 1 0 65535 mQ 07 23 Motor Rated Slip Motor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 07 24 Motor Pole Number Motor 1 2to 10 07 25 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA 07 26 Motor No Load Current Motor 2 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA M 07 27 Torque Compensation Motor 2 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 M 07 28 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 4 20 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 07 29 Motor Line to line Resista
40. Preface i Table of Contents cccccsiteetscteccccesbectciy ete iii Chapter 1 Introduction enne 1 1 1 1 Receiving and Inspection 1 2 1 1 1 Nameplate Information 1 2 1 1 2 Model Explanation 1 2 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 1 3 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 1 3 1 1 5 Remove Instructions eterne teet 1 6 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 7 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions emn 1 7 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives Parallel eei ee ee Eee Er iet 1 10 1 3 Dimensloris eer re e Red 1 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring eere 2 1 VIN WINING PETER 2 2 2 2 External Wiring 2 2 repeto a 2 10 2 3 M i GinCuit EHE 2 11 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection eeessseeen e 2 11 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals 2 14 2 4 Control Terminals ccccccececccececeeaeeeeceeeceseeaeseeeeeeseseaaeeeeeeeeeeaeans 2 15 Chapter Keypad and Start Up eene 3 1 3 1 Keypad iode onde eee beetle tee de rete eni dede tet 3 1 3 2 Operation Method
41. RUN Key Start AC drive operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data such as Master Frequency MODE Change between different display mode Status Display Display the driver s current status STOP RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred LED Display and etc Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units ENTER Used to enter modify programming parameters Potentiometer For master Frequency setting Display Message Descriptions jesroP FWDe REV le jesroP le estor FWDe le estor FWD REV le RUNS jestoP FWDe REV e le estor FWD REV le estor FWDe REV le 5 FWDe REV e le Displays the AC drive Master Frequency Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 User defined unit where U F x Pr 00 05 Displays the output current at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Displays the AC motor drive forward run status Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status The counter value C Displays the selected parameter ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories Display Message mune neve STOP Een neva FWDe
42. Read Only ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 39 Chapter 4 Parameters Display HH 00 08 Password Input Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 2 times of wrong password The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set Pr 00 09 Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts After consecutive failed attempts a blinking codE will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password rg Password Set Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr 00 08 1 Password has been set To set a password to protect your parameter settings If the display shows 0 no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr 00 08 All parameters can then be changed including Pr 00 09 The first time you can set a password directly After successful setting of password the display will show 1 Be sure to record the password for later use To cancel the parameter lock set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr 00 08 The password consists of min 1 digits and max 4 digits How to make the password valid again after decoding by 00 08 Method 1 Re input original password into Pr 00 09 Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one Meth
43. Wii display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC at Monitor EEC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 Program PLC2 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is PLC1 status Simple position This function should be used with Pr 01 20 Pr 01 25 for simple function position Refer to Pr 01 25 for details The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with 5B OOB Out of PLC for washing machine When this setting is enabled it will get Balance Detection A0 value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 Motor selection bit When this setting is enabled it can be used for motor selection 27 0 Pr 01 01 01 06 01 26 01 43 07 18 07 38 07 00 07 06 For example 27 MI2 28 When MI1 and MI2 are OFF it selects motor 0 A Motor selection bit When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF it selects motor 1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 When is OFF and MI2 is it selects motor 2 When MI1 and MI2 are ON it selects motor 3 4 143 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details 12 00 Al1 Function Selection Factory S
44. rated current the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following chart If output current is 10096 rated current the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz Mounting method Method A Frame A Frame amp Method Frame amp eom ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 55 Chapter 4 Parameters A s 25 Cwith mounting method A 100 15 Cwith mounting method 90 35 Cwith mounting method gt 25 Cwith mounting method 80 5 50 Cwith mounting method 8 70 40 Cwith mounting method B 3 60 50 40 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14 2 15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 115V 230V Series A 100 25 Cwith mounting method A 15 Cwith mounting method B 90 S f 80 35 C with mounting method A 5 25 Cwith mounting method 5 70 9 50 Cwith mounting method A 60 40 Cwith mounting method w 50 40 gt Carrier 2kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz15kHz Frequency 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 460V Series 02 04 Motor Direction Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Forward Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forward operation disabled This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation 4 56 ADV50 SW PW 1 11
45. v13 n 3 To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion please be aware of When S gt D the BMOV command is processed in the order as 0595 G he arrangement on the designated device numbers X10 BMov p20 D19 D20 L gt Dus D21 gt D20 p22 2 021 When lt D the BMOV command is processed in the order as 959 0 X11 p10 p11 D1O 3 D11 D11 gt D12 512 _ p13 API Mnemonic Operands Function 20 ADD P S4 S2 D Addition Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps x Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD ADDP 7 steps 5 ele o Wee e S a e Tele fe D Operands 1 Summand S2 Addend D Sum ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 51 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 This instruction adds 1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result D 3 The highest bit is symbolic bit and 1 which is suitable for algebraic addition e g 3 9 6 4 changes in binary addition 16 bit command A If the operation result 0 zero flag M1020 On B Ifthe operation result lt 32 768 borrow flag M1021 On C If
46. 0x1001 Error register 0 RO 98 COB ID SYNC 0 1005 0 0x80 RW U32 0 1006 0 Communication cycle RW 032 us 500us 15000us period 0 0 1008 0 Manufacturer device RO U32 name 0 Manufacturer 0100900 hardware version 0 BO 0 100 0 Manufacturer software RO U32 version 0 0 100 0 Guarding time 0 RW 916 ms 0x80 node 1 0 1000 0 Guarding factor 0 RW U8 0x0000080 0 1014 0 COB ID emergency Node ID RO U32 It is set to be 0x1015 O Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 100us multiple of 10 0 Number 0 1 RO U8 Heartbeat time can 0x1016 1 Consumer heartbeat oxo RW U32 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid Heartbeat time can 0x1017 0 Producer heartbeat oxo RW 46 1ms be used when time Guarding time is invalid 0 jNumber 0x3 RO U8 1 Vender ID 0x000001DD RO U32 0x1018 0x00002600 2 Product code model RO U32 3 Revision 0 00010000 RO U32 Server SDO 0x1200 0 Parameter 2 RO U8 COB ID Client gt 0x0000600 1 Server Node ID Nee ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix D CANopen Function Index Sub Definition ie R W Size Unit NOTE COB ID Client 0x0000580 Server Node ID RO Use Number 2 U8 0x00000200 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1400 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type
47. 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 31 Control Board CPU READ failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 35 39 Reserved 40 Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 4 18 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Group 7 Motor Parameters Chapter 4 Parameters Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 407 00 Motor Rated Current 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA Motor 0 Motor No Load A 07 01 Current Motor 0 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA Torque 07 02 Compensation 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 Motor 0 407 03 Slip Compensation 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 Used without PG Motor 0 0 Disable Motor Parameters 07 04 Auto Tuning 1 Auto tuning R1 0 2 Auto tuning R1 no load test Motor Line to line 07 05 Resistance R1 0 65535 mQ 0 Motor 0 07 06 Motor Rated Slip 9 99 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 Motor 0 07 07 Slip Compensation 0 to 250 200 Limit Torque 07 08 Compensation Time 0 01 10 00 Sec 0 10 Constant 07 09 Slip Compensation 9 95 10 00 sec 0 20 Time Constant Accumulative Motor 07 10 Operation Time 0 to 1439 Min 0 Min Accumulative Motor 07 11 Operation Time 0 to 65535 Day 0 Day Motor PTC 0 Disable 07 12 Overheat Protection 4 Enable 0 Input Debouncing 07 13 Time of the PTC 0 9999 2ms 100 Protection ADV50 SW PW 1 11
48. 7th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency NM 8th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 07 Frequency NM 9th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 08 Frequency NM 10th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 09 Frequency 05 11th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 11 12th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 12 13th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 14th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 13 Frequency LA 15th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 14 Frequency Group 6 Protection Parameters 1 Factory 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Over Current Stall 06 01 Prevention during Accel Over Current Stall 06 02 Prevention during Operation 4 16 115 230V series 330 0V to 410 0V 460V series 660 0V to 820 0V 390 0V 780 0V 0 0 Disable over voltage stall prevention LN LI ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 0 Disable 20 to 250 0 Disable 20 to 250 Chapter 4 Parameters 1 Factory Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Over Torque 06 04 Detection Level Over Torque 00 09 Detection Time Electronic Thermal Overload Relay 06 06 Selection Electronic Thermal 06 07 Characteristic Present Fault Record Second Most Recent Fault Record ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected stop running 0 110600 sec 0 Standard motor self cooled by fan 1 Special motor forc
49. 9 RFPD750DT 266 S8TOCZ RFPD750DT 38R S8TOCU 200 70 106 17 5 93 5 RFPD750DT 45R S8TOCV 1700 7 9 2 8 4 17 0 69 3 68 RFPD750DT 80R S8TOCD RFPD750DT 100R S8SY4 320 70 106 17 5 93 5 2 7 RFPD1100DT 55R S8T1DA 12 6 2 8 4 17 0 69 3 68 5 95 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 B 5 Appendix B Accessories B 2 Non fuse Circuit Breaker Chart Per UL 508C paragraph 45 8 4 part a T For 1 phase drives the current rating of the breaker shall be 4 times maximum input current rating 2 For 3 phase drives the current rating of the breaker shall be 4 times maximum output current rating Refer to Appendix A for rated input output current 1 phase 3 phase Recommended Recommended Model non fuse Model non fuse breaker A breaker A ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 15 ADV50 1004 XXX 4F 5 ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 20 ADV50 1007 XXX 2T 10 ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF 30 ADV50 1007 XXX 4F 5 ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 50 ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 20 ADV50 1015 XXX 4F 10 ADV50 2022 XBX 2T 30 ADV50 2022 XBX 4F 15 ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 40 ADV50 2037 XBX 4F 20 ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 50 ADV50 3055 XBX 4F 30 ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 60 ADV50 3075 XBX 4F 40 ADV50 3110 XBX 4F 50 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted Appendix B Accessories Line Fuse
50. D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group D10 will rotate to the left as shown in the figure below The bit marked with gt will be sent to carry flag M1022 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 57 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Hi Rotate to the left 2 1 upper bit lower bit n LT BEBEREREEBEPERER D10 arry x LL eee 16 bits After one rotation upper bit totheleft wer bit m1022 1 9 1 1 x flag ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 58 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 5 11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive API Mnemonic Operands Function 53 DHSCS S1 S2 D Compare for high speed counter Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY KnM D DHSCS 13 steps 1 S2 D Operands S1 Comparison Value S2 High speed counter C235 D Comparison result Explanations 1 2 It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse To count automatically please set the target value by using DHSCS command and
51. MI3 MI9 are set to external fault the AC motor drive cc Ei External Fault stops output U V and W 2 Give RESET command after fault has been cleared c F TH Internal EEPROM can not be Please contact Gefran Drive amp Motion Control programmed Unit Technical Assistance Internal EEPROM can not be Please contact Gefran Drive amp Motion Control C t programmed Unit Technical Assistance _ 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to en Internal EEPROM can not be factory setting read Please contact Gefran Technical Assistance 1 Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting Please contact Gefran Technical Assistance Internal EEPROM can not be read 2 U phase error THI 2 Please contact Gefran Drive amp Motion Control Unit Technical Assistance 3 OV or LV m EN lt Temperature sensor error Tw 09 eu tu um ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 3 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault Fault Descriptions Name cFR Auto accel decel failure Communication Error Corrective Actions Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged Check for possible poor insulation at the When one of the output terminal s is grounded short circuit current is more than 5096 of AC motor drive rated current the AC motor drive power module may be damaged cc NOTE The short circuit protection is provided E for AC motor
52. Model Number ADV50 XXXX 1004 1007 1 2022 2037 3055 3075 Max Applicable Motor Output kW 04 075 15 22 37 55 7 5 Max Applicable Motor Output hp 7 5 10 gt Rated Output Capacity kVA 95 125 Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 Single 3 phase 3 phase Rated Input t a egal 6 527 9 5 5 1 1579 24 15 20 6 26 34 w c Single 3 phase 3 phase 5 Rated Vollage Frequency 200 240 V 50 60Hz 200 240V 50 60Hz Voltage Tolerance 10 180 264 V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63 Hz Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 1 2 1 9 3 5 3 5 Voltage Class 400 V 460 V Class Power ratings at 400 V Max Applicable Motor Output kW 04 om 15 22 a7 55 75 11 Max Applicable Motor Output hp 15 ae p ee ov rn s Rated Output Current A Output Rating Maximum Output Voltage V 3 Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency Hz 0 1 600 Hz Carrier Frequency kHz 1 15 3 phase Rated Input LM or ei LE 19 32 43 71 112 14 19 26 w M Rated Voltage Frequency 3 phase 380 480V 50 60Hz fae 8 Voltage Tolerance 10 342 528V Frequency Tolerance 5 47 63Hz Cooling Method Natural Cooling Fan Cooling Weight kg 4 2 4 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 A 1 Liviu Appendix A Specifications Control Characteristics Operating Characterist
53. PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback 1241 Al2 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI3 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVI4 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Ea Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 145 Chapter 4 Parameters Ba Min AVI4 Input Voltage AVI3 AVO1 AVO2 1E 1H TR 18 ACI2 ACO2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 12 13 Min AVI4 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 EN Max AVIA Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 1245 Max AVIA Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 1216 Min ACI3 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 1217 Min ACI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 4 146 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 1220 W T
54. STX B o Address m m Function g 2 Starting data T address 2 0 Number of data 0 count by word o 2 D LRC Check T CR END LF Command message Address 01H Function 03H Starting data 21H address 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH STX P o Address 4 0 Function g Number of data 0 Count by byte 4 4 Content of starting 7 address 2102H T m o Content of address Mu 2103H o o 7 LRC Check 4 CR END LF Response message Address 01H Function 03H Number of data 04H count by byte Content of address 17H 2102H 70H Content of address ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CT L V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters CRC CHK High F7H 2 06H single write write single data to register 2103H 00H CRCCHKLow FEH CRC CHK High 5 Example writing data 6000 1770H to register 0100H AMD address is 01H Response message ASCII mode Command message STX 0 Address 4 0 Function 6 0 m Data address 0 0 4 7 Data content 7 0 7 LRC Check 4 CR END LF RTU mode Command message Address 01H Function 06H Data address 01H ADV50 SW PW V1 1 CTL V2 11 STX o Address 4 o Function 6 o 4 Data address 0 o 4 7 Data content 7 o 7 LRC
55. T L3 W T3 i Recommended Circuit e when power supply a Multi function contact output is turned OFF bya 240Vac 2 5A Max fault output OFF RB 4 120Vac 5A Max 28Vdc 5 Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting MOT Factory setting NPN Mode 4 gt Drive is in operation fs Factory Ye 48V50mA Max 1 setting _4 Multi function PNP Phot l Output Please refer to Figure 7 MCM i a for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode Factory setting ACI Mode AVI sve ACI ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 O Main circuit power terminals 2 4 Digital Signal Common Analog Multi function Output i i Terminal i factory setting Analog freq current meter 0 10VDC 2mA B Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency RS 485 serial interface i P 10 20 5KQ 2 OAVI 1 Reserved Master Frequency 2 EV 1 Oto 10V 47K D Agi 5 SG 4 20mA 0 10V BG Reserved 8 lt 1 7 Reserved Analog Signal Common LOO 8 Reserved oc ontrol circuit terminals 1 Shielded leads amp Cable ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Figure 3 for models of ADV50 Series ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring a braking resistor i BR i optional J BUE _ braking uni
56. W when power is still applied to L1 R L2 S L3 T even when the AC motor drive has stopped The DC link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels even if the power has been turned off 3 1 Keypad e e READY RUN FAULT There are three LEDs on the keypad LED READY It will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off LED RUN It will light up when the motor is running LED FAULT It will light up when fault occurs ADV50 SW PW 1 10 CTL V2 10 3 1 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 2 Operation Method The operation method can be set via communication control terminals and optional keypad KB ADV50 A RS 485 port RJ 45 It needs to use USB 485 ADV20 50 converter to connect the PC B Control terminal to MI6 C Keypad mounting port 3 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Operation Operation Command Method Frequency Source Source When setting communication by the PC it needs to use EXP USB ADV50 or Operate from the USB 485 ADV20 50 converter to connect to the PC communication PES Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details FWD Stop Factory setting REVI St Mit NPN Mode OP MI2 NPN Factory Multi step 1 55 MI3 setti
57. switch is set to be OFF nn When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 for details B D The first second frequency operation command is enabled disabled by Multi Function Input Terminals Please refer to Pr 04 05 04 08 0201 Source of First Operation Command Factory Setting 1 Settings Digital keypad Digital keypad is optional External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled External terminals Keypad STOP RESET disabled RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled W N O 4 52 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1 digital keypad is optional Ea When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal please refer to Pr 02 05 Pr 04 04 for details Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency Second Master Frequency 02 02 Stop Method Settings 0 1 2 3 STOP ramp to stop STOP coast to stop STOP ramp to stop STOP coast to stop EF ER E F EF Factory Setting 0 coast to stop coast to stop ramp to stop ramp to
58. 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is 1 0 Hz and Acceleration Deceleration Time is 10 seconds The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1 0Hz is in this case 9 83 seconds 60 1 10 60 9 83secs Frequency 01 00 Max output Frequency setting operation X frequency 01 05 Min output frequency Decel Time Time CEO CEA Thedefinitionof Time i 0 Hz Accel Time Resulting Decel Time Resulting Accel Time Resulting Accel Decel Time Jog Acceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 0114 Jog Deceleration Time Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 45 Chapter 4 Parameters ELE Jog Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz Factory Setting 6 00 Only external terminal JOG to MI12 can be used When the Jog command is ON the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 to Jog Frequency Pr 01 15 When the Jog command is OFF the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero The used Accel Decel time is set
59. 04 00 0 0 adjustment S Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias 30Hz feum Pr 04 02 200 Input gain d Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 5V 100 200 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 71 Chapter 4 Parameters Example 5 Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example a 1V negative bias is used In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin 1V in this example Negative e bias6Hz 1V Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 100 10V Bias adjustment 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 Example 6 Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached OHz Negative 7 bias 6 6Hz adjustment pr 91 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 10 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 111 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Gain 10V 9V 100 111 Bias adjustment 6 6Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 10 0 Example 7 Use of 0 10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example the input is programmed to run
60. 11 CTL V2 11 D 12 Appendix D CANopen Function Factory Index Sub Definition Setting RW Size Unit Map NOTE can t be set to 0 0 disable drive function 1 slow down slow down ramp 2 slow down on quick stop ramp 2th decel time Quick stop option Ox605A 0 code 2 RW 516 1ms Yes 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP Mode of 2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode operation ox6061 Mode of 2 RO U8 Yes operation display D 2 How to Control by CANopen To control the AC motor drive by CANopen please set parameters by the following steps Step 1 Operation source setting set Pr 02 01 to 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled Step 2 Frequency source setting set Pr 02 00 to 5 CANopen communication Step 3 CANopen station setting set Pr 09 13 CANopen Communication Address 1 127 Step 4 CANopen baud rate setting set Pr 09 14 CANBUS Baud Rate Step 5 Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary Set Pr 04 05 to 04 08 or Pr 11 06 to 11 11 to 23 According to DSP 402 motion control rule CANopen provides speed control mode There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop To get current status please read Status Word Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external termi
61. 20 x 16 bit data DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC check sum CRC CHK High 16 bit check sum consists of 2 8 bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3 2 Address Communication Address Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254 Acommunication address equal to 0 means broadcast to all AC drives AMD In this case the AMD will not reply any message to the master device OOH broadcast to all AC drives 01H AC drive of address 01 OFH AC drive of address 15 10H AC drive of address 16 FEH AC drive of address 254 For example communication to AMD with address 16 decimal 10H ASCII mode Address 1 0 gt 1 31H 0 30H RTU mode Address 10H 3 3 Function Function code and DATA data characters The format of data characters depends on the function code 03H read data from register 06 write single register 08H loop detection 10H write multiple registers The available function codes and examples for ADV50 are described as follows 1 O3H multi read read data from registers Example reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H AMD address is 01H ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 117 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 118 ASCII mode Command message Response message RTU mode
62. 485 port RJ 45 The LED READY will light up after applying power The light won t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off 1 4 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction RFI Jumper Location Frame A Frame B Frame C near the output above the nameplate above the warning label terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Frame Power range Models pane OA RM pave 1 ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F B 1 5 0 75 3 7kW 7 5 15hp 5 5 11kW ADV50 3075 XXX 2T 4F ADV50 Jumper RFI Jumper The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference Radio Frequency Interference on the power line Main power isolated from earth If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power IT power the RFI jumper must be cut off Then the RFI capacities filter capacitors will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage according to IEC 61800 3 and reduce earth leakage current ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 After applying power to the AC motor drive do not cut off the RFI jumper Therefore please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1 000V Besides electro magnetic compatibility of the AC motor
63. 6 Reserved 7 Reserved Profibus DP Interface DB9 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 8 Reserved RS 485 Interface RJ45 Connecting to ADV50 and supply power to EXP PDP ADV20 50 PROFIBUS DP Interface DB9 9 PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS DP network NET LED Indicating the connection status between EXP PDP ADV20 50 and PROFIBUS DP Address Switches Setting the address of EXP PDP ADV20 50 on PROFIBUS DP network B 27 Appendix B Accessories 6 Extended Socket 4 PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS DP network B 9 3 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 g O0 e ADDH ADDL N e 1 Ann qu 34 8 1 37 2279 47 UNIT mm inch 4 B 9 3 3 Parameters Settings in ADV50 ADV50 Baud Rate 9600 Pr 09 01 1 RTU 8 2 09 04 3 Freq Source Pr 02 00 4 Command Source Pr 02 01 3 B 9 3 4 Power Supply The power of EXP PDP ADV20 50 is supplied from ADV50 Please connect ADV50 to CME PD01 by using 8 pins RJ 45 cable which is packed together with EXP PDP ADV20 50 After connection is completed EXP PDP ADV20 50 is powered whenever power is applied to ADV50 B 9 3 5 PROFIBUS Address Sop ase ADDH ADDL ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 28 Appendix B Accessories EXP PDP ADV20 50 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PR
64. 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 Display the output power in kW of terminals U V and W 2 1 to the motor Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates JI iy to current C Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal V Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal mA or display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal V Ci ca E m i age Display the temperature of IGBT h in C Display 2 level 1 c c E E Display AVI4 ACI level i my age Display PG speed in RPM G ca Display motor number M Ea When Pr00 03 is set to 03 the display is according to the setting of Pr00 04 0005 User Defined Coefficient Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 tod 160 0 Factory Setting 1 0 Ea The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user defined unit The display value is calculated as follows U User defined unit Actual output frequency K Pr 00 05 Example A conveyor belt runs at 13 6m s at motor speed 60Hz K 13 6 60 0 22 0 226667 rounded to 1 decimal therefore Pr 00 05 0 2 With Frequency command 35Hz display shows U and 35 0 2 7 0m s To increase accuracy use K 2 2 or K 22 7 and disregard decimal point 00 06 Power Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display HAH 00 07 Control Board Software Version Settings
65. 7 11 06 Terminal Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 Multi Step speed command 3 Multi function Input 7 11 07 Terminal MI8 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Multi function Input 11 08 Terminal Accel Decel time selection command Jog Operation External base block Multi function Input Up Increment master frequenc 11 09 Terminal MI10 d i Down Decrement master frequency Counter Trigger Signal Count t 11 10 Multi function Input STE TESS Terminal M111 External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 11 11 Multi function Input 16 Output shutoff stop Terminali M142 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation command selection keypad ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 27 Chapter 4 Parameters P Factory 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 Group 12 Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Factory Disabled Source of the 1st frequency 126 Alt Function Source of bi 2nd frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback Negative PID feedback fo
66. 9 2 5 LED Indications eene reinen tees B 27 B 9 3 Profibus Communication Module EXP PDP ADV20 50 B 27 B 9 3 1 Panel B 27 B 9 3 2 Dimensions sssee ene B 28 B 9 3 3 Parameters Settings in 50 B 28 B 9 3 4 Power Supply eee B 28 B 9 3 5 PROFIBUS B 28 9 4 EXP CAN ADV20 50 CANopen 29 B 9 4 1 Product Profile insisi inie B 29 B 9 4 2 Specifications 1 eene t nett eres B 29 B 9 4 3 Components eint eerte tee dnte nein dne B 30 9 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting B 31 10 01 ae een eb ets B 33 B 10 1 KIFDIN 50 SA od Se eee eo Dette B 33 B 10 2 KIT DIN 50 58 trennen B 34 B 10 8 KIT GROUND nt ees eet B 34 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function eene C 1 C 1 PEC Overview C 1 C 1 1 Introduction re tn ene rite C 1 C 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor Soft PLC ADV50 C 1 72 Start up unie mi ee e C 2 C 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution C 2 C 2 2 Device Reference
67. ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Factory 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of First 1 0 to 10V from AVI 702 00 Master Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from 1 AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication 0 Digital keypad 1 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET enabled 2 External terminals Keypad STOP RESET Source of First disabled 02 01 3 RS 485 RJ 45JUSB communication 1 Keypad STOP RESET enabled 4 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 5 CANopen communication Keypad STOP RESET disabled 0 STOP ramp to stop E F coast to stop 1 STOP coast to stop E F coast to stop 02 02 Stop Method 2 STOP ramp to stop E F ramp to stop 3 STOP coast to stop E F ramp to stop PWM Carrier 02 03 Frequency 1 to 15kHz Selections 0 Enable forward reverse operation 02 04 ee 1 Disable reverse operation 2 Disabled forward operation 0 Disable Operation status is not changed 02 05 Line Start Lockout even if operation command source Pr 02 01 1 is changed 1 Enable Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 7 4 ECCE Factory Sat Disable Operation status will change if operation comma
68. Base Block 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software protection enabled codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure CF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure CF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF 1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF 4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 2100H 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 29 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 1 31 Control Board CPU WRITE failure cF2 1 32 ACI signal error AErr 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 2101H Status of AC drive Bit 0 1 00B RUN LED is off STOP LED is on The AC motor Drive stops 01B RUN LED blinks STOP LED is on When AC motor drive decelerates to stop 10B RUN LED is on STOP LED blinks When AC motor drive is standby 11B RUN LED is on STOP LED is off When AC motor drive runs ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function Bit 2 1 JOG command Bit 3 4 00B FWD LED is on REV LED is off When AC motor drive runs forward 01B FWD LED i
69. C How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function END Program End Operand None Explanations It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program PLC will scan from address o to END command after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again C 5 9 Description of the Application Commands Mnemonic Steps API Codes Function Command 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 32 bit 10 CMP Y Compare 7 Transmission 11 ZCP Y Zone compare 9 Comparison 12 MOV z Y Data Move 5 15 BMOV Y Block move 7 Perform the addition of 7 Y 20 ADD BIN data Perform the subtraction 7 ae Y SUB of BIN data Perform the 7 Four 22 MUL Y multiplication of BIN Fundamental data Operations of Arithmetic m Perform the division of 7 DIY BIN data 24 INC 7 rerom the addition of 3 25 DEC x Perform the subtraction 3 of 1 Rotation and 30 ROR Rotate to the right 5 Displacement 34 ROL Y Rotate to the left 5 Special 53 DHSCS X High speed counter 13 command for enable AC motor drive 139 FPID Control PID parameters 5 of inverter ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 46 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Steps Codes Command Function 16 bits 32 bits 16 bit 82 bit 440 FREQ a Control frequency of 5 inverter 141
70. CTL V2 11 4 77 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description dE PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHz Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and 17 enable write parameters is disabled Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the terminals priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Digital When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Keypad priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting When the settings 18 19 and 20 are ON at the same time the Communication priority should be setting 18 gt setting19 gt setting20 This function has top priority to set the direction for running If 21 Forward Reverse 02
71. Internal Terminal Status Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad communication or PLC Ea For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following 5 of 23 5 5 5 O set internal terminal to be OFF Weight 1 set internal terminal to be ON GEJ To For example if setting 5 and MI6 to be ON Pr 04 28 should be set to bit5X2 bit4x2 bit2X22 1 25 1 24 1 22 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 87 Chapter 4 Parameters Bit MI1 MI6 When extension is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows Ozset internal terminal to be OFF Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 set internal terminal to be ON Bit 0 M om om mom mom mom 5 4 88 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Group 5 Multi step Speeds Parameters 05 00 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 05 07 05 08 05 09 05 10 05 11 05 12 05 13 05 14 1st Step Speed Frequency Chapter 4 Parameters Unit 0 01 M 2nd Step Speed Frequency A 3rd Step Speed Frequency X 4th Step Speed Frequency X 5t
72. Load contact B X Y M T AND Series connection with A contact X Y T ANI Series connection with B contact X Y T OR Parallel connection with A contact X Y M T C ORI Parallel connection with B contact X T Series connects the circuit block ORB Parallel connects the circuit block 5 Save the operation result MRD Read the operation result the pointer not moving 77 MPP Read the result INV Inverter the result ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 29 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 5 2 Output Commands Commands Function Operands OUT Drive coil Y M SET Action latched ON Y M RST Clear the contacts or the registers 5 3 Commands Function Operands TMR 16 bit timer T K or T D CNT 16 bit counter C K or C D C 5 4 Main Control Commands Commands Function Operands MC camee the common series connection NO N7 MCR Disconnect the common series connection NO N7 C 5 5 Rising edge falling edge Detection Comman contacts ds of Contact Commands Function Operands LDP Rising edge detection operation starts X Y T LDF Falling edge detection operation starts X T Rising edge detection series connection X T ANDF Falling edge detection series connection X T Rising edge detection parallel connection X
73. Modbus in ASCII format protocol 9600 7 N 2 LonTalk free topology with FTT 10A 78 Kbps LonTalk terminal 4 pin terminals wire gauge 28 12 AWG wire strip length 7 8mm RS 485 port 8 pins with RJ 45 B 9 2 4 Wiring Service LED Service Pin PowerLED SPLED 5 1 Reserved 5 SG 2 EV 6 Reserved 3 GND 7 Reserved 4 SG 8 Reserved 3L LonTalk LonTalk ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 26 Appendix B Accessories Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol Function 1 These are twisted pair cables to connect Ede ded to LonTalk system Terminals 1 and 2 2 should be used as one group and the 3 same for terminals 3 and 4 XE B 9 2 5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of EXP LWK ADV20 50 If the communication is normal power LED SP LED should be green red LED means abnormal communication and service LED should be OFF If LEDs display do not match refer to user manual for details B 9 3 Profibus Communication Module EXP PDP ADV20 50 B 9 3 1 Panel Appearance 1 SP LED Indicating the connection status between ADV50 and EXP PDP ADV20 50 a gt M Address Switches NETLED SPLED ADDH ADDL RS 485 RJ45 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 5 SG
74. Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level or Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal Refer to 16 PID supervision Pr 10 12 and Pr 13 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output 19 Active when the drive is standby or stop Signal Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAvE Bi Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt Pr 03 11 Deactivated when Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 12 after STOP command 22 Drive ready Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected Desired Frequency 2 23 Active when the desired frequency 2 Pr 03 14 is attained Attained Desired Frequency 1 Attained Desired Frequency 2 Attained Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 If a multi function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained 03 00 to Pr 03 01 09 then the output will be activated when the programmed frequency is attained ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 63 Chapter 4 Parameters Frequency detection 2 2 Frequency WEE i etection rang d detection desired 22 2 range fi waiting time 4 4 03020344 lor f DC braking time during stop lt gt run
75. RPR Y Read the parameter 9 142 WPR Y Write the parameter 7 C 5 10 Explanation for the Application Commands API Mnemonic Operands Function 10 CMP P S S Compare Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OF xX Y M K H KnY T D CMPP 7 steps 5 a a lls ye S ede E D ede Operands S1 Comparison Value 1 S2 Comparison Value 2 D Comparison result Explanations 1 2 3 4 Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices See the specifications of each model for their range of use The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values When b15 1 in 16 bit instruction the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values Program Example 1 2 Designate device YO and operand D automatically occupies YO Y1 and Y2 When X10 On CMP instruction will be executed and one of YO Y1 and Y2 will be On When X10 Off CMP instruction will not be executed and YO Y1 and Y2 remain their status before X10 Off If the user need to obtain a comparison result with gt lt and make a series parallel ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 47 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function connection between YO Y2 K10 D10 Yo
76. Setting 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt 2 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt 3 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt 4 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt 5 Modbus mode protocol lt 8 0 1 gt 6 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt 7 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt 8 Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt 9 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt 10 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt 11 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt Ea 1 Control by PC or PLC ADV50 can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange or RTU Remote Terminal Unit Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr 09 04 Code Description The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset Therefore there is atleast 1 second delay time in master station ASCII mode Each 8 bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters For example a 1 byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII consists of 6 36Hex and 4 34Hex Character 0 He 2 3 4 5 e T ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H Character 8 9 B C D E ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 4 114 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11
77. Spikes short interruptions etc Ouf line reactor should be installed Optional when the power supply capacity is 500 or more or advanced capacity is activated The wiring distance should be lt 10m Zero phase reactors are used to Zero phase reduce radio noise especially when uh an audio equipment is installed near the Ferrite Core inverter Effective for noise reduction Common on both the input and output sides Choke Attenuation quality is good for a wide Optional range from AM band to 10MHz P Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor RF OUT ADV20 50 EMI filter To reduce electromagnetic interference Braking Used to reduce the deceleration time Resistor and of the motor Please refer to the chart Braking Unit Appendix for specific Braking Optional Resistors Motor surge voltage amplitude depends on motor cable length For Optional applications with long motor cable gt 20m it is necessary to install a reactor at the inverter output side ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 Main Circuit 2 3 1 Main Circuit Connection Figure 1 For frame A ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 4 T ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F Braking Resistor Optional BRI J BUE Braking Unit Non fuse breaker ou NFB Me x R amp 8 R L1 U T1 O Motor 2512 V T2 T
78. are transmitted in a non confirmed mode PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index 1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO and all transmission types are listed in the following table Type Number PDO Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only 0 1 240 241 251 Reserved 252 o 253 254 255 Type number 1 240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions Type number 252 indicates the data is updated but not sent immediately after receiving SYNC Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 D 7 Appendix D CANopen Function Type number 254 Gefran CANopen doesn t support this transmission format Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary Example Master transmits PDO data to Slave PDO1 CAN H e gt gt CAN L gt gt Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 0x88 Index Sub efinition Value R W Size 7 0 60400010 PDO1 X Se
79. auto tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor 3 Fill in Pr 01 01 Pr 01 02 Pr 07 00 Pr 07 04 and Pr 07 06 with correct values 4 After Pr 07 04 is set to 2 the AC motor drive will execute auto tuning immediately after receiving a RUN command Note The motor will run The total auto tune time will be 15 seconds Pr 01 09 Pr 01 10 Higher power drives need longer Accel Decel time factory setting is recommended After executing Auto tune Pr 07 04 is set to 0 5 After executing please check if there are values filled in Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 If not please press RUN key after setting Pr 07 04 again 6 Then you can set Pr 00 10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement gt 1 In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel 2 Itis not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive 0705 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter The user may also set this parameter without using Pr 07 04 0706 Motor Rated Slip Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 4 98 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters En Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the follo
80. by PLC Bit10 1 MI11 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC o 04 25 The Analog Input Read only 4 14 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 04 19 ACI AVI2 Selection E 04 20 Min AVI2 Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V Parameter Chapter 4 Parameters Factory NW by PLC Bit0 1 AVI used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 Al1 used by PLC Bit3 1 AI2 used by PLC Read only Status MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Status Bit4 MI5 Status Display the Status of Multi function Bit5 MI6 Status Input Terminal Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status Internal External 0 4095 04 27 Multi function Input Terminals Selection Internal Terminal 0 4095 04 28 Status Group 5 Multi Step Speeds Parameters 3 Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer LA 1st Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 00 Frequency M 2nd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 01 Frequency 05 02 3rd Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 15 Chapter 4 Parameters i x Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer LA 4th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 05 03 Frequency 05 04 9th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 o5 6th Step Speed 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Frequency 05 06
81. by the Jog Accel Decel time Pr 01 13 Pr 01 14 Before using the JOG command the drive must be stopped first And during Jog operation other operation commands are not accepted except commands via the FORWARD REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad Frequency 01 15 JOG linn Frequency 01 05 Min output frequency essai te Ole JOG Accel Time JOG Decel Time Time 4 101 13 01 14 The definition of JOG Accel Decel Time M Auto Acceleration Deceleration Factory Setting 0 Settings Linear acceleration deceleration Auto acceleration linear Deceleration 0 1 2 Linear acceleration auto Deceleration 3 Auto acceleration deceleration set by load 4 Auto acceleration deceleration set by Accel Decel Time setting With Auto acceleration deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting stopping the load During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current 4 46 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters During Auto deceleration regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time But when this parameter is set to 04 the actual accel decel time will be equal to or more than par
82. drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi pot tests are performed The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high To prevent drive damage the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system or a corner grounded TN system 1 1 5 Remove Instructions Remove Keypad Remove Front Cover 1 Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover Pull the cover up to release ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Remove RST Terminal Cover For Frame B and Frame C wired directly For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be Remove UVW Terminal Cover For Frame B and Frame C For frame A it doesn t have cover and can be wired directly Remove Fan Remove Extension Card 1 2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1 2 1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions Air Temperature Relative Humidity Atmosphere pressure Installation Site Altitude Vibration Operation ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 10 50 14 122 F for UL amp cUL 10 40 C 14 104 F for side by side mounti
83. in counter and the counter should add 1 There are 16 bit 32 bit and high speed counter for user to use Equipment indication C1 C7 The symbol of equipment is and the number uses decimal Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order timer value and counter value The data register is used to store data or parameters It stores 16 bit binary number i e a word in each register It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words Equipment indication DO D1 D29 The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 9 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function The structure and explanation of ladder diagram Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment Normally open contact LD X Y M T C Normally closed contact b LDI X Y T Serial normally open AND Y T J Parallel normally open OR X Y T B Parallel normally closed ORI X Y M T C Hte Rising edge trigger switch LDP X Y M T C Hu Falling edge trigger switch LDF X Y T mA Rising edge trigger in serial ANDP X LY Falling edge trigger in serial ANDF Rising edge trigger in parallel ORP X Y M T Falling edge trigger in parallel ORF T a Block in serial ANB none
84. is Visual inspection deformed cracked damaged or with changed color change due NOTE Please ignore the color to overheating or ageing change of copper plate If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection Any missing characters Visual inspection hanical parts Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year d Visual and aural inspection or vibration If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws If any part is deformed or damaged Visual inspection If there is any color change by Visual inspection overheating If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 7 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Terminals and wiring of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due Visual inspection to overheat If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has Visual inspection If there is any damage Visual inspection DC capacity of main circuit Maintenance Period Chec
85. m Block in parallel ORB none t MPS Multiple output MRD none MPP ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment 2 Output command of coil drive OUT Y M S Please refer to Basic command Application Application basic command command command and application command Inverse logic INV none C 3 3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line the right power line will be omitted during the edited of Soft PLC ADV50 After editing a row go to editing the next row The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts If you need more than 11 contacts you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly The drawing is shown as follows XO X X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 XT X10 CO C1 H H H H H H H H 00000 X11 X12 X13 0000 N Row Number The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner The output handling including the operation frame of coil and application command at the most right side in ladder diagram Take the following diagram for example we analyze the process step by step The number at the right corner is the explanation order
86. may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz 60Hz Therefore when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12 20 its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature failing insulation and unstable torque output AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Output Voltage Pr 01 02 For instance if Pr 01 02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 109 Chapter 4 Parameters at 200V to 264VAC then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC When the motor ramps to stop the deceleration time is longer When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration deceleration the deceleration will be quicker 08 19 Software Braking Level Unit 0 1 the Action Level of the Brake resistor Settings 230V series 370 0 to 430 0V Factory Setting 380 0 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V Factory Setting 760 0 This parameter sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated m D This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 4F ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 2T 4F and ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F without brake chopper for which BU 2 4 ADV20 50 brake unit must be used 08 20 Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Unit 0 1 Settings 0
87. measured variable feedback controls the output frequency Hz Select input terminal accordingly Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr 10 00 Master Frequency When Pr 10 00 is set to 2 3 the set point Master Frequency for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI AVI2 external terminal 0 to 10V or 4 20mA or from multi step speed When Pr 10 00 is set to 1 the set point is obtained from the keypad Negative feedback means target value feedback Positive feedback means target value feedback 10 02 Proportional Gain P Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 1 0 This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain If the other two gains I and D are set to zero proportional control is the only one effective With 10 deviation error and P 1 the output will be P x10 x Master Frequency 4 132 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters fae The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning Em Time 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 100 0 sec Factory Setting 1 00 0 00 Disable Ea This parameter specifies integral control continual sum of the deviation and associated gain I When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed the output is equal to the input deviation once the integral time setting is attained L The parameter can be set during
88. operation GEE 000 Ground fault 2240H 1 Lu 000DH Lower than standard voltage 3220h 2 000 Loss 3130h 7 55 000FH External Base Block 9000h 7 cod 0011 Software protection failure 6320h 7 cf iG 0013H Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed cFelj 0014H EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 HPF 0015H current clamp 5000h 7 HPF 0016H OV hardware error 5000h 2 HPF3 0017H hardware error 5000h 2 4264 0018H hardware error 5000h 1 cF 30 0019H error 2300h 1 cF31 001AH error 2300h 1 cF3e 001BH W phase error 2300h 1 cF33 001CH j OVorLV 3210h 2 cF34 001DH Temperature sensor error 4310h 3 cf 11 001FH Internal EEPROM can not be 5530h 7 programmed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 9 Appendix D CANopen Function Controller CANopen Mad n I rror Display Error Description Error Register Code Code bit 0 7 i 0020H nternal EEPROM can not be read 5530h 7 Geer 0021H Analog signal error FFOOh 7 i 0023H Motor overheat protection 7120h 3 PGE 0024 signal error 7300h 7 cP iG 0029H Communication time out error on the 7500h 4 control board or power board Definition of Index fear Factory Index Sub Definition Setting R W Size Unit NOTE 0 1000 O Abort connection option code 0x00010192 RO
89. operation result OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OUT Output coil X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 00 029 Y Y Explanations Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device Motion of coil contact OUT command Operation Contact result Coil A contact normally contact normally closed FALSE OFF Non continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non continuity Program Example ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 37 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Ladder diagram Command code Operation X0 X1 LDI Load contact of XO l C AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function SET Latch ON X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand P4 v e x Explanations When the SET command is driven its specific device is set to be ON which will keep ON whether the SET command is still driven You can use the RST command to set the device to OFF Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation Xo YO LD X0 Load contact A of Hit ps D ANI YO Connect to contact B of YO in series SET Y1 Y1 latch ON Mnemonic Function RST Clear the contacts or the registers X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand v Y v
90. or misoperation efran Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Motor stalls during Check if acceleration Yes _lincrease setting time acceleration time is too short x Check if the inertia Yes N ofthe motor and load Use special motor gt is too high N o Thicken or shorten the Reduce load or wiring between the Yes lowvoltage increase the capacity motor or AC motor drive P of AC motor drive No Reduce load Yes increase the capacity lt 2 load torque of AC motor drive NES 190g 4 No x Maybe AC motor drive has Check if the torque Yes malfunction or misoperation compensation is suitable due to noise Please contact Gefran No Increase torque compensation 5 12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Check Pr 01 01 thru 01 06 Motor does not run Adjust Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 gt dt m ti as expected ME M SS and lower torque compensation Yes Y ho lt in low speed continuously gt 88 Please use specific motor No Y Is load too large eS Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive No y Check output voltage of U V W Y99 Motor has malfunction Nis balanced Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction misoperation due to noise Please contact Gefran 5 8 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapt
91. over voltage occurred without load Maybe AC motor drive No has malfunction or Y misoperation due to No When OV occurs check if the noise Please contact 4 voltage of DC BUS is greater Gefran than protection value Yes Yes No Dose OV occur when Increase Yes sudden acceleration deceleration stops time Yes No Increase Yes acceleration I Increase setting time time No Y 4 Need to consider using Reduce moment braking unit of inertia lt Reduce moment of load inertia DC braking p Use braking unit or DC braking ig Need to check control method Please contact Gefran 5 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 4 Low Voltage Lv Low voltage i 2 Yes Is input power correct Or power p including momentary power loss No Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Restart after reset Check if there is any malfunction yes component disconnection in gt power supply circuit Change defective component and check connection No Check if voltage is within specification Make necessary corrections such as change power supply system for requirement Check if there is heavy load with high start current in the same power system Yes Using the different power supply for this drive and heavy load system No Check i
92. phase compensation capacitors or L C Inductance Capacitance or R C Resistance Capacitance unless approved by Gefran W DO NOT connect phase compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives W Use well insulated motor suitable for inverter operation Terminals B1 B2 for connecting brake resistor B1 B2 W Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps short deceleration time too low braking torque or requiring increased braking torque W if the AC motor drive has a built in brake chopper frame B and frame C connect the external brake resistor to the terminals B1 B2 W Models of frame A don t have a built in brake chopper Please connect an external optional brake unit BU 2 4 ADV20 50 series and brake resistor Refer to BU 2 4 ADV20 50 series user manual for details BR Brake resistor unit optional Refer to Appendix B W Connect the terminals P N of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals B1 The length of wiring should be less than 5m with twisted cable W When not used please leave the terminals B1 open Short circuiting B2 or to B1 can damage the AC motor drive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 3 2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Frame B Frame C
93. same time save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 m LDI Load contact B of XO AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT 1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function AND Series connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Explanations The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation y 1 E CY LDI Load contact of X1 AND X0 Connect to contact A of in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 32 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ANI Series connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v Explanations The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving th
94. sto Time Setting 02 master freq attained p E output signal Setting 9 23 ore desired freq Attained setting 03 zero speed indication ON OFF ON setting 19 zero speed indication ON OFF ON output timing chart of multiple function terminals when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication ETE Analog Output Signal AFM Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency Meter 0 to Maximum Output Frequency 1 Analog Current Meter 0 to 25096 of rated AC motor drive current This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0 10 0 is common 03 04 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 20096 Factory Setting 100 Q This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM A When Pr 03 03 is set to 0 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 of the AC motor drive corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output Similarly if Pr 03 03 is set to 1 the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output current of the AC drive With Pr 03 04 set to 100 then 2 5 times the rated current corresponds to 10VDC on the AFM output Any type of voltmeter can be used If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V Pr 03 04 should be set using the following formula Pr 03 04 meter full scale vol
95. the symbols of electric control circuit PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel such as button switch relay timer counter and etc The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit such as relay coil and contact It doesn t have the real components in it In PLC it just has a basic unit of internal memory If this bit is 1 it means the coil is ON and if this bit is O it means the coil is OFF You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Open NO or contact a Otherwise you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact Normally Closed NC or contact b Many relays will need many bits such as 8 bits makes up a byte 2 bytes can make up a word 2 words makes up double word When using many relays to do calculation such as add subtraction or shift you could use byte word or double word Furthermore the two equipments timer and counter in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times In conclusion each internal storage unit occup
96. timer 0 RW U16 1ms 0 Number 2 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60410010 RW U32 0x1A00 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60430010 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1A01 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 Index Sub Definition caine RW Size Unit Map NOTE Abort connection DNO Ioan 0x6007 0 2 RW 16 Yes 2 Disable Voltage option code 3 Quick stop 0x603F 0 Error code 0 RO U16 Yes bit 3 switch status bit 4 rfg enable 0x6040 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes bit 5 rfg unlock bit 6 rfg use ref bit 7 Fault reset BitO Ready to switch on Bit1 Switched on Bit2 Operation enabled Bit3 Fault Bit4 Voltage enabled Bit5 Quick stop 0x6041 O Status word RO U16 yas 219 Swit h on disabled Bit7 Warning Bit8 Bit9 Remote Bit10 Target reached Bit11 Internal limit active Bit12 13 Bit14 15 0x6042 vl target velocity 0 16 rpm Yes 0x6043 viwelocity 16 Yes demand z If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the Oxeo4r o V ramp function 10000 5 032 1 Yes unit must be 100ms and time can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6050 0 slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes junit must be 100ms can t be set to 0 If Pr 01 19 is set to 0 1 the 0x6051 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and ADV50 SW PW V1
97. with an end signal in the last segment The Object Dictionary OD is a group of objects in CANopen node Every node has an OD in the system and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior The access path of OD is the index and sub index each object has a unique index in OD and has sub index if necessary The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 6 Appendix D CANopen Function Data 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 71615 3 12 110 Index Index Data Data Data Data command L H Sub LL LH HL HH Initiate Domain Client 0 0 1 N JES Download Server O 1 1 Initiate Domain 0 1 0 Upload Server 0 1 0 ES Abort Domain Client 1 0 0 Transfer Server 1 010 fad N Bytes not use E normal 0 expedited 1 S size indicated D 1 4 3 PDO Process Data Object PDO communication can be described by the producer consumer model Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices Every PDO has two PDO services a TxPDO and a RxPDO PDOs
98. x2 X4 Y1 input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting 2 In this way Y1 2 can execute Y2 sequential Example 7 Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is AT AT Y1 AT AT The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1 In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1 Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON Finally coil Y1 will be OFF The result of repeated scan coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle timeAT On AT Off The vibrating circuitry of cycle time AT On AT Off ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 16 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Ia Y1 The figure above uses timer TO to control coil Y1 to be ON After Y1 is ON timer TO will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1 The oscillating circuit will be shown as above n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number T is the base of timer clock period Example 8 Blinking Circuit iF oe n2 T 1 T1 The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms It uses two timers to control On OFF time of Y1 coil If figure n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2 T is the base of timer clock period Example 9 Trigger
99. 0 5 0 Factory Setting 0 0 The drift current will occur a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable using this parameter it will improve this situation greatly m The drift current zone of the high power motors is usually in the low frequency area It is recommended to set to more than 2 0 Sampling Time Unit 0 1 D Settings 0 1 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 08 22 Number of OOB Sampling Times Unit 1 Settings 0 00 to 32 Factory Setting 20 Average Sampling Angle Settings Read only Factory Setting The Out Of Balance Detection function be used with PLC for washing machine When multi function input terminal is enabled MI 26 it will get value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 When value is large it means unbalanced load At this moment it needs to lower the freqeuency command by PLC or the host controller On the other hand it can be high speed operation 4 110 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters ETE DEB Function Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 0825 DEB Return Time Unit 1 Settings 0 250 sec Factory Setting 0 Ea The DEB Deceleration Energy Backup function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss When
100. 00 9999 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X10 1000 C 10000 65535 display It will only display the first 3 digits The LED at the bottom right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value For example the actual value for the following figure is 100X100 10000 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 6 5 6 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function When it is changed to PLC2 RS 485 will be used by PLC When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode the function to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled i e Pr 00 02 can t be set to 9 or 10 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 7 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 3 Ladder Diagram C 3 1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Read input state from outside Xt Start 4 Calculate the result by ladder ee diagram algorithm it doesn t M100 X3 X10 Execute in cycles sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will l l QD output immediately X100 M505 t End Send the result to the output point C 3 2 Introduction Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of
101. 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Ea The V f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 51 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 2 Operation Method Parameters 0200 Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 1 02 09 X Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Digital keypad is optional 0 to 10V from AVI 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication Digital keypad potentiometer ak WN CANopen communication These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive B D The factory setting for master frequency command is 1 digital keypad is optional Setting 2 use the switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI AVI2 When setting to AVI AVI2 is indicated When the 3 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the source of first master frequency command Pr 02 00 will force setting to 2 This setting Pr 02 00 can t be changed till the 3
102. 04 0 Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer Source of second to Pr 02 00 and 02 09 22 frequency id ON 2 Frequency command source command enabled 2 OFF 1 Frequency command source 4 78 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status 24 Download Execute Monitor PLC Program PLC2 When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status 25 Simple position function This function should be used with Pr 01 20 Pr 01 25 for si
103. 05 01 40 00 OFAOH AC drive address is 01H ASCII Mode ADV50 SW PW V1 Command message Response message STX A Address 1 0 Address 0 Function 1 Function 0 0 T 5 Starting data address 0 0 0 Number of data count by word 0 2 Number of data 0 count by byte 4 The first data EH content 3 g 1 CTL V2 11 STX E Address 1 D Address 0 ae Function 1 1 Function 0 0 T 5 Starting data address 0 0 oO Number of data count by word 0 2 Number of data 0 count by byte The first data T content 3 g 4 121 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 122 The second data content LRC Check END The second data content LRC Check END Response message Address 01H Function 10H Starting data address 05H 00H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC Check Low 41H CRC Check High 04H RTU mode Command message Address 01H Function 10H Starting data 05H address 00H Number of data 00H count by word 02H Number of data 04 count by byte The first data 13H content 88H The second data OFH content AOH CRC Check Low 4DH CRC Check High D9H 3 4 Check sum ASCII mode LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check is calculated by summing u
104. 0502 i i i d Pod a d Po 105 12 09V i ias T 1 1 1 E 105 13 Run Stop 0 9 10 PU external terminals communication 3 c 1st speed T T d ot T o NNI 1 T T co MI3 to 6 1 _ OM 121 CN ON ON ON ON aan 5 S 2nd speed F uA mE PoolJ wsbwWc2 OFt CM 8 2 Sz 3 1o i a ee ee ZELS Misto Mie ort O 8 3 4thspeed P og B 2535 tuis 4 Ole JogFreq OFE i C101 1 Em Multi speed via External Terminals 4 80 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters MI6 4 MI5 3 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2 speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3 speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON Multi function Input Contact Selection T 04 09 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 En This parameter can be used to set the status of multi function terminals MI1 MI6 N O N C for standard AC motor drive The MI1 MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation comm
105. 07 16 the warning display will disappear 07 13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Unit 2 Settings 0 9999 is 0 19998ms Factory Setting 100 This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc 07 18 Motor Rated Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Motor No load Current Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 20 Torque Compensation Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 07224 Motor Pole Number Motor 1 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 07 25 Motor Rated Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Motor No load Current Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA 07 27 Torque Compensation Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 X Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mO Factory
106. 08 Pr 06 12 50Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 50Hz and Pr 01 02 will be set by Pr 00 12 60Hz Pr 01 00 and Pr 01 01 are set to 60Hz and Pr 01 02 is set to 230V or 460V When 00 02 1 all parameters are read only To write all parameters set 00 02 0 ET X Start up Display Selection Settings 0 1 2 Factory Setting 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx Display the actual output frequency Hxxx Display the output current in A supplied to the motor Axxx Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx FWD REV command PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 drive This parameter determines the start up display page after power is applied to the drive For setting 5 PLCO disable PLC1 run PLC PLC2 read write PLC programs into AC motor EU Content of Multi function Display Settings 0 4 38 Factory Setting 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx Display the counter value which counts the number of pulses on TRG terminal Display PLC D1043 value C Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC motor drive Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 to the motor Display PID analog feedback signal value in Display the power factor angle in of terminals U T1 ann V T2 W T3 to the motor ee ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 00 04 A Content of Multi function Display
107. 1 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 09 11 Time out Detection 0 1 120 0 seconds for USB Card 0 0 Disable COM port for PLC 0 RS485 09 12 RO Communication 1 USB card Group 10 PID Control Parameters 1 Factory ODisblePIDopraion Disable PID ODisblePIDopraion 1 Keypad based on Pr 02 00 PID Set Point 2 0 to 10V from AVI Selection 3 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from AVI2 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 10 01 Input Terminal for 2 Positive PID feedback from external PID Feedback terminal ACI 4 20 AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 10 02 Gain 0 0 to 10 0 10 04 Derivative Control 0 00 to 1 00 sec D Upper Bound for 10 05 Integral Control 0 to 100 10 06 Primary Delay Filter 9 9 to 2 5 sec Time PID Output Freq s PID Feedback 10 08 Signal Detection 0 0 to 3600 sec 0 0 disable Time ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 25 10 03 Integral Time 1 0 00 to 100 0 sec 0 00 disable 1 Chapter 4 Parameters 1 Factory 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Erroneous PID 1 Warn and COAST to stop Feedback Signals 2 Warn and keep operation Gain Over the PID 10 19 Detection Value DOT Source of PID Set 0 00 to 600 0Hz N 10 11 point 10 12 P
108. 1 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit3 1 MI4 used by PLC Bit4 1 used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 MI10 used by PLC Bit10 1 used by PLC Bit11 1 MI12 used by PLC Ea For standard AC motor drive without extension card the equivalent 6 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each digital input The value for Pr 04 24 to display is the result after converting 6 bit binary into decimal value Weights 25 2f 2 5 9 2 O notused 1 used by PLC Bit Mh Ea For example when Pr 04 24 is set to 52 decimal 110100 binary that indicates MI3 MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 83 Chapter 4 Parameters When extension is installed the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows used Weights _2 2 2 2 2 222 2 2 2 2 15Usedby PLC Bit The Analog Input Used by PLC Settings Read Only Factory setting Display Bit0 1 AVI used by PLC Bit1 1 ACI AVI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 used by PLC Bit3 1 AI2 used by PLC The equivalent 2 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog input The value for Pr 04 25 to display is the result after converting 2 bit binary into decimal value We
109. 1 10 0307 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Terminal count value attained no EF display 1 Terminal count value attained EF active If this parameter is set to 1 the desired value of counter is attained the AC drive will treat it as a fault The drive will stop and show the EF message on the display ETE Fan Control Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 65 Chapter 4 Parameters 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan Digital Output Used by PLC Settings Read Only BitO 1 Bit1 1 Bit2 1 Bit3 1 Bit4 1 Bit5 1 Bit6 1 Bit7 1 RLY used by PLC used by PLC MO2 RA2 used by PLC used by PLC MO4 RA4 used by PLC MOS RAS used by PLC MO6 RAG6 used by PLC MO7 RA7 used by PLC Factory setting 84 The equivalent 8 bit is used to display the status used not used of each digital output The value that Pr 03 09 displays is the result after converting 8 bit binary into decimal value For standard AC motor drive it only has 2 bit bitO and When extension is installed the number of the digital output terminal
110. 16 setting the T contact 3 points with the same number x will be On 16 bit count up for Total is general pec ote genie 8 points When the counter 1 phase input indicated by CNT 32 bit E P command attains the Counter count 1 phase 2 setting the C contact phase i Total i up down inputs C235 1 point need wae with the same number high to use with PG card 1 point will be On Speed 2 2 counter inputs ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 19 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Items Specifications Remarks When timer attains the T Present value of timer TO T15 16 points contact of timer will be On When timer attains the Present value of counter C0 C7 8 bit counter 8 points contact of timer will be Es On g For latched DO D9 10 points 9 Total is aD Data For general D10 D29 20 points It can be memory area 75 for storing data 5 D1000 D1044 45 points o For special B points ind Decimal 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation e 5 Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation Communication port for read write RS485 slave program Analog input output Built in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Function extension module optional Digital input output card A D D A card C 4 2 Devices Functions W The Function of I
111. 2 for Simple Position Delay Time at 50Hz 01 29 for Simple Position Maximum Voltage 01 26 Frequency Fbase Motor 1 Maximum Output 01 27 Voltage Vmax Motor 1 Mid Point 01 28 Frequency Fmid Motor 1 Mid Point Voltage 0129 Vmid Motor 1 Minimum Output 01 30 Frequency Fmin Motor 1 Minimum Output 01 31 Voltage Vmin Motor 1 Maximum Voltage 01 32 Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Maximum Output 01 33 Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Mid Point 01 34 Frequency Fmid Motor 2 z ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters me 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 4 5 Chapter 4 Parameters ewe e NES Vmid Motor 2 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Minimum Output Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 2 Voltage Vmin Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Motor 3 Maximum Output 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 220 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 3 Mid Point Voltage 115V 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V Vmid Motor3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V Minimum Output Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 3 Voltage Vmin Voltage Vmax E Motor 3 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 440 0 DEB 4 6
112. 39 O30 98881 Fax 39 030 9839063 info gefran com www gefran com GEFRAN SUISSE SA Rue Fritz Courvoisier 40 2302 La Chaux de Fonds Ph 41 0 329684955 Fax 41 0 329683574 office gefran ch GEFRAN FRANCE 4 rue Jean Desparmet BP 8237 69355 LYON Cedex 08 Ph 33 0 478770300 Fax 33 0 478770320 commercial gefran fr GEFRAN INC Automation and Sensors 8 Lowell Avenue WINCHESTER MA 01890 Toll Free 1 888 888 4474 Ph 1 781 7295249 Fax 1 781 7291468 info gefranisi com Drive amp Motion Control Unit Via Carducci 24 21040 Gerenzano VA ITALY Ph 39 02 967601 Fax 39 02 9682653 infomotion gefran com GEFRAN INC Motion Control 14201 D South Lakes Drive NC 28273 Charlotte Ph 1 704 3290200 Fax 1 704 3290217 salescontact sieiamerica SIEI GERMANY Zachersweg 17 D 74376 Gemmrigheim Ph 49 7143 9730 Fax 49 7143 97397 info sieiareg de GEFRAN SIEI UK Ltd 7 Pearson Road Central Park TELFORD TF2 STX Ph 44 0 845 2604555 Fax 44 0 845 2604556 sales gefran co uk Technical Assistance technohelp gefran com Customer Service motioncustomer gefran com Ph 39 O2 96760500 Fax 39 O2 96760278 GEFRAN SIEI ASIA Loyang way 03 19 Loyang Industrial Estate 508769 SINGAPORE Ph 65 6 8418300 Fax 65 6 7428300 info gefransiei com sg GEFRAN SIEI Electric Block B Gr Flr No 155 Fu Te Xi Yi Road Wai Gao Giao Trade Zone 200131 Sh
113. 4 2 static and 2 relays 7 6 static and 1 relays 6 4 static and 2 relays 4 2 statiche e 2 a rel 4 2 statiche e 2 a rel 7 6 statiche e 1 a rel 6 4 statiche e 2 a rel RS485 3 Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus DP CANopen GEFRAN S p A Headquarters Via Sebina 74 RS485 3 Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus DP CANopen Drive amp Motion Control Unit Via Carducci 24 RS485 3 Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus DP CANopen FastLink GDNet RS485 3 Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus DP CANopen Interbus Technical Assistance technohelp gefran com 21040 Gerenzano VA ITALY Ph 39 O2 967601 Fax 39 O2 9682653 infornotion gefran com 25050 Provaglio d Iseo BS ITALY Ph 39 030 98881 Fax 39 030 9839063 info gefran com www gefran com Customer Service motioncustomer gefran com Ph 39 02 96760500 Fax 39 O2 96760278 GEFRAN Drive amp Motion Control Unit Technology Vif control Vif amp Sensorless Vector Vector Field Oriented Controllo Vettoriale Orientam di Flusso Model Modello 200 Applications Applicazioni Centrifugal Pumps amp Fans Pompe Centrifughe e Ventilatori e e e Conveyors Trasportatori e e Converting Extruders Winders Converting Estrusori Avvolgitori e e e Material Handling e e e Machine Tools Macchine Utensili e hd Packaging Positioning Imballaggio
114. 4 3 2 r o Rrelay1 MO1 MO2 RA2 MO4 RA4 5 5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 69 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters ETE X Keypad Potentiometer Bias Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 M Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias X Keypad Potentiometer Gain Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 200 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias Reverse Motion Enable Disable Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias REV Motion Enabled Example 1 Standard application This is the most used setting The user only needs to set Pr 02 00 to 04 The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer GO Zia ne Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 0 Bias adjustment 30Hz Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command OHz OV 5V 10V Example 2 Use of bias This example shows the influence of changing the bias When the input is OV the output frequency is 10 Hz At mid point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency To use the full potentiometer range please refer to Example 3 The value of external input vo
115. 4 cores in 510 5 3 35 5 1 legrem series without winding Single A Diagram lt 2 33 6 38 4 Zero Phase Reactor Power RILI Supply 512 53 3 535 1 Diagram tud Three core lt 1 5424 sso 4 Diagram Note 1 The table above gives Note 600V Insulated unshielded Cable approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i e the cable must fit through Diagram A the center hole of zero phase reactors Please wind each wire 4 times around the core The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible Note 2 Only the phase conductors should pass through not the earth core or screen Zero Phase Reactor Note 3 When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor Power RILI UIT may be required to reduce radiated Supply 94 vm emissions from the cable WIT3 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 12 Appendix B Accessories B 6 MEMORY KB ADV20 50 B 6 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KB ADV20 50 Frequency Command Status indicator Output Frequency Status indicator User Defined Units Status indicator JOG By pressing JOG key Jog frequency operation UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical LED Display Indicates frequency voltage current user defined units read and save etc
116. 5 Please contact Gefran Drive amp Motion Control Unit Technical Assistance When the external input terminal B B is active the AC motor drive output will be turned off Deactivate the external input terminal B B to operate the AC motor drive again ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault RE Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines 2 Torque boost too high Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 3 Acceleration Time too short Increase the Acceleration Time 4 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Deceleration Time too short Increase the Deceleration Time 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model Over current during acceleration Over current during deceleration a n Cu 1 Short circuit at motor output Check for possible poor insulation at the output line 2 Sudden increase in motor loading Check for possible motor stall 3 AC motor drive output power is too small Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model oon Over current during constant speed operation 1 When multi function input terminals
117. 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RO 98 0x80000300 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 0x1401 00 Acyclic amp Synchronous 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchronous 255 Asynchronous 0 Number 2 RW 98 1 1 Mapped Object 0x60400010 RW U32 0x1600 2 2 Mapped Object 0x60420020 RW U32 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 0 RW U8 1 1 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0x1601 2 2 Mapped Object 0 RW 032 3 3 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4 4 Mapped Object 0 RW U32 0 Number 5 RO U8 0x00000180 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 00 Acyclic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp 0x1800 2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 Synchrouous 253 Remote function 255 Asynchronous 3 Inhibit time o RW U16 10005 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 Reserved 5 Event timer 0 RW 916 1ms 0x1801 0 Number 5 U8 0 80000280 1 COB ID used by PDO Node ID RW U32 2 Transmission Type 5 RW 98 00 Acyelic amp Synchrouous 01 240 Cyclic amp Synchrouous 253 Remote function ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 11 Appendix D CANopen Function Index Sub Definition Sie Unit NOTE 255 Asynchronous n It is set to be 3 nhibit time 0 RW U16 100us multiple of 10 4 Reserved 3 RW U8 5 Event
118. 5 XBX 4F 3 111 750 1000 e pee 1 115 960 7 5 ADV50 3075 XBX 4F 4 148 750W o RE rd 1 107 690 15 11 ADV50 3110 XBX 4F 6 186 1100W 559 o irr M Ue 100 530 Internal Braking Unit ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 1 Appendix B Accessories gt 1 Please select the brake unit and or brake resistor according to the table Please use the braking unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value 2 damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the braking modules in use are not provided by Gefran the warranty will be void Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt 5 Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive 6 When using more than 2 brake units equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can t be less than the value in the column Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive the right most column in the table T Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation 8 Definition for Braking Usage ED Explanation The definition of the barking usage ED is for assurance of enough time for the braking unit and braking resistor to di
119. 50 60Hz 3 Phase kw HP Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 2 1 4 4 4 9 12 0 4 1 2 6 6 6 5 9 0 75 1 8 12 5 1 5 2 8 12 1 5 3 2 2 3 12 18 1 25 25 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 8 Appendix B Accessories kW HP i ha eee Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 3 7 5 18 27 0 8 1 5 55 7 5 25 37 5 0 5 1 2 7 5 10 35 52 5 0 4 0 8 460V 50 60Hz 3 Phase kw HP dis ee a Amps 3 impedance 5 impedance 0 4 1 2 2 3 20 32 0 75 1 4 6 9 12 1 5 2 4 6 6 5 9 2 2 3 8 12 5 7 5 3 7 5 12 18 2 5 4 2 5 5 7 5 18 27 1 5 2 5 7 5 10 18 27 1 5 2 5 11 15 25 37 5 1 2 2 B 4 3 Applications Connected in input circuit ADV50 Application 1 Question When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power and one of them is ON during operation When applying power to one of the AC motor drive the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs during operation SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 9 Appendix B Accessories Correct wiring M1 reactor S Y YA AC motor drive motor Vo M2 Jj CD PTS AC i moto motor drive motor Ne uu Mn L AC motor drive NL Application 2 Question Switching spikes will be gener
120. 50 connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct LED Blinking 1 returns error Check the PLC program ensure the Green code index and sub index is correct Green ON Normal Communication is normal LED Descriptions State Description LED ON Constantly on LED OFF Constantly off LED blinking Flash on for 0 2s and off for 0 2s LED nile On for 0 2s and off for 1s flash zc On for 0 2s off for 0 2s on for 0 2s and off for 1s ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 32 Appendix B Accessories B 10 DIN Rail B 10 1 KIT DIN 50 SA ETH 1 JE I IL E El L Lj Du Li 84 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 33 Appendix B Accessories B 10 2 KIT DIN 50 SB B 10 3 KIT GROUND EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable Ln seal TWO HOLE STRAP TWO HOLE STRAP 1 2 CLAMP ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 34 Appendix B Accessories ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 35 Appendix B Accessories This page intentionally left blank ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 36 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 1 PLC Overview C 1 1 Introduction The PLC function built in the ADV50 provides following commands Soft PLC ADV50 basic commands and application commands C 1 2 Ladder Diagram Editor Soft PLC ADV50 Soft PLC AD
121. 6 Factory Setting 4 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0 No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table Multi Step Speed Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to select for Multi Step Speed application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive 4 76 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is 6 Accel Decel Inhibit stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed Accel Decel Time Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to 7 Selection Pr 01 12 See explanation at the end of this table Command Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 for Jog control Jog Operation 8 Control NOTE Prog
122. A Internal External Multi function Input Terminals Selection Unit 1 Settings 0 to 4095 Factory Setting 0 This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal external terminal You can activate internal terminals by Pr 04 28 A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time For standard AC motor drive without extension the multi function input terminals MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following 5 4 533 3 5 5 O external terminal D us a2 2 228 1 internal terminal 5 2 1 0 g The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input Q For example if setting MI5 MI6 to be internal terminals and MI2 to be external terminals The setting value should be bit5X2 bit4X2 bit2X2 1X2 1X24 1X27 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following 4 86 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 5 4 3 2 1 20 O external terminal Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 internal terminal Bit 0 MI1 MI6 Ea When extension card is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows Ozexternal terminal Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 internal terminal Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
123. Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current 12 22 Aol Analog Output 4 i5 200 I ain ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 29 12 10 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 0 AVO2 AO2 Terminal Analog Signal Mode 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACC2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Parameter 2 Analog Output 0 Analog Frequency Signal 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current Gain 4 30 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Y Factory 0 Disabled 1 Single phase 13 00 PG Input 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation 13 01 PG Pulse Range 1to20000 to 20000 Wa Pole Number 13 03 oS Gain 0 0 to 10 0 E TL 13 04 Integral Gain 1 0 00 to 100 055 00 to 100 00 sec Speed Control Output Frequency 0 00 to 100 00Hz 10 00 Limit 13 06 Speed Feedback o to 9999 500 Display Filter Detection Time for 0 0 disabled Feedback Signal 1 Fault 0 1 to 10 0 sec 0 Warn and RAMP to stop Treatment of the Feedback Signal 1 Warn and COAST to stop 1 Fault 2 Warn and keep operation w13 09 Speed Feedback b to 9999 16 Filter Source of the High 9 PG card Read speed Counter 1 PLC Only ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 31 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search
124. C 6 Error Code Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Code ID Description Corrective Actions Check if the program is error and PLod 20 write error download the program again Power on again and download the PLSv 21 Data write error when executing program again 1 Please upload again PLdA 22 Program upload error 2 Return to the factory if it occurs continuously Check if the program is error and PLFn 23 Command error when download download program again program P it d Power on again and download program PLor Program capacity exceeds again memory capacity PLFF 31 error when executing PLSn 32 Check sum error PLEd 33 There is no END command in the program PLCr 34 The command MC is continuous used more than nine times ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 65 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function This page intentionally left blank ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 66 Appendix D CANopen Function The built in CANopen function is a kind of remote control Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol CANopen is a CAN based higher layer protocol It provides standardized communication objects including real time data Process Data Objects PDO configuration data Service Data Objects SDO and special functions Time Stamp Sync message and Emergency message And it also has network management data including Boot up message NMT me
125. CI ACM W Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible 20m with proper grounding If the noise is inductive connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement W f the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive please connect a capacitor 0 1 and above and ferrite core as indicated the following diagrams ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 17 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Digital inputs MI1 MI6 DCM W When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce Digital outputs MO1 MCM W Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity see wiring diagrams W When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber or fly back diode across the coil and check the polarity General W Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference If necessary let them cross only at 90 angle W The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The specification for the control terminals RA RB RC Th
126. Check 4 CR END LF Response message Address 01H Function 06H Data address 01H 4 119 Chapter 4 Parameters 00H 00H 17H 17H Data content Data content 70H 70H CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H 3 08H loop detection This command is used to detect if the communication between master device PC or PLC and AC motor drive is normal The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device ASCII mode Command message Response message STX E STX o Address Address 4 m o Function Function g g o 0 m Data address Data address oO o 4 4 7 7 Data content Data content T T m T T LRC Check LRC Check o m CR CR END END LF LF RTU mode Command message 4 120 Response message ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Address 01H Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH Address 01H Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH 4 10H write multiple registers write multiple data to registers Example Set the multi step speed Pr 05 00 50 00 1388H Pr
127. Desired frequency 2 attained Desired Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz Attained Analog Output 0 Analog frequency meter Signal Selection AFM 1 current meter 403 04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 12008 03 05 Terminal Count 0 to 9999 Value Preliminary Count 0 to 9999 Value EF Active When 0 Terminal count value attained no EF Terminal Count display Value Attained 1 Terminal count value attained EF active Fan Control 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops fan will be OFF 4 10 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Read only Bit0 1 RLY used by PLC Bit121 MO1 used by PLC The Digital Output Bit2 1 MO2 RA2 used by PLC Used by PLC Bit3 1 MO3 RA3 used by PLC Bit4 1 MO4 RA4 used by PLC Bit5 1 MO5 RAS5 used by PLC Bit6 1 MO6 RA6 used by PLC Bit7 1 MO7 RA7 used by PLC Read only The Analog Output Bitd 1 AFM used by PLC Used by PLC Bit1 1 AO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC 03 11 Brake Release 0 00 to 20 00Hz Frequency Brake Engage 0 00 to 20 00Hz Frequency Read only RLY Status MO1 Status Display the Status of Bit2 MO2 RA2 Status Multi function Bit3 MO3 RA3 Status Output Terminals MOA RAA Status Bit5 MO5 RA5 Status Bit6 MO6 RA6 Status Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status Desired Frequenc
128. E 1 gt 1AH lt 7 0 1 gt 0AH lt 8 N 2 gt 07H lt 8 E 1 gt 1BH lt 8 0 1 gt 0BH for i 0 i lt 16 i while inportb PORT LSR amp 0x20 wait until THR empty outportb PORT THR tdat i send data to j i 0 while kbhit if inportb PORT LSR amp 0x01 bO 1 read data ready rdat i inportb PORT RDR read data form booa 09 05 Reserved Reserved ETE X Response Delay Time Unit 2ms Settings 0 200 400msec Factory Setting 1 This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following 1 unit 2 msec PC or PLC command RS485 BUS Response Message of AC Drive Handling time of AC drive Max 6msec Transmission Speed for USB Card Factory Setting 2 Response Delay Time Pr 09 07 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps Baud rate 9600 bps Baud rate 19200 bps Baud rate 38400 bps Baud rate 57600 bps A OU N This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card 4 130 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Kel Communication Protocol for USB Card Settings o Factory Setting 1 Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 1 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 1 gt Modbus RTU mode
129. ID Offset Level 1 0 to 50 MOto500 Detection Time of 10 14 Sleep Wake Up 6550 sec Detection Time 10 15 Sleep Frequency Dooto6000Hz 00 to 600 0 Hz 10 16 Wakeup Frequency 0 00 to 600 0 Hz L Minimum PID 0 By PID control Output Frequency Selection 1 By minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card Factory gt a MO4 RA4 10 Terminal count value attained 11 03 Multi function Output Terminal 4 26 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 AC drive operational Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Multi function Base Block B B indication Output Terminal Low voltage indication Operation mode indication oN DoF WN Fault indication Multi function 9 Output Terminal Desired frequency 1 attained 11 Preliminary count value attained 12 Over Voltage Stall supervision 13 Over Current Stall supervision Chapter 4 Parameters cn MO5 RA5 4 Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Multi function Forward command Output Terminal MOG RAG Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Multi function Brake control Desired frequency 11 05 Output Terminal attained MOTIRAT Drive ready Desired frequency 2 attained No function Multi function Input
130. It should be less than 25VDC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 6 5 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Disconnect AC power before processing 2 Only qualified personnel can install wire and maintain AC motor drives Please take off any metal objects such as watches and rings before operation And only insulated tools are allowed 3 Never reassemble internal components or wiring 4 Prevent static electricity Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and see if Visual inspection and measurement with equipment with standard there any dust gas oil or water drops specification Check if there are any dangerous objects in the Visual inspection environment Voltage Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half One Daily Year Year Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct Measure with multimeter with standard specification 6 6 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Keypad Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Mec Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year If there are any loose or missing Tighten or replace the screw screws If machine or insulator
131. OFF OFF 9 speed ON OFF OFF ON 10 speed ON OFF ON OFF 11 speed ON OFF ON ON 12 speed ON ON OFF OFF 13 speed ON ON OFF ON 14 speed ON ON ON OFF 15 speed ON ON ON ON ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 6 Protection Parameters 06 00 Over Voltage Stall Prevention Unit 0 1 Settings 230V series 330 0 to 410 0V Factory Setting 390 0 460V series 660 0 to 820 0V Factory Setting 780 0 0 Disable Over voltage Stall Prevention with brake unit or brake resistor E During deceleration the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration When this function is enabled the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again Ea Over Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled Pr 06 00 0 when a brake unit or brake resistor is used gt raa With moderate inertia load over voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads If the deceleration time is critical for the application a brake resistor or brake unit should be used high voltage at DC side over voltage EC YN detection level time output i frequency Frequency Held Deceleration characteristic when Over Voltage S
132. OFIBUS address The set value via 2 address switches ADDH and ADDL is in HEX format ADDH sets the upper 4 bits and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address Address Meaning 1 0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address 0 or OX7E OxFE Invalid PROFIBUS address B 9 4 EXP CAN ADV20 50 CANopen EXP CAN ADV20 50 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Gefran ADV50 AC motor drive B 9 4 1 Product Profile COM port CANopen connection port RUN indicator ERROR indicator SP Scan Port indicator Baud rate switch Unit mm Address switch 9 4 2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector 5 08mm Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2 wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 29 Appendix B Accessories Communication Process Data Objects 10 Kbps PDO 20 Kbps Service Data Object 50 Kbps SDO _ Baud 125 Kbps Message type Synchronization rate 250 Kbps SYNC 500 Kbps Emergency EMCY 800 Kbps Network Management 1 Mbps NMT Product code Gefran ADV50 AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 Environmental Specifications Noise Immunity ESD IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 2 8KV Air Discharge EFT IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 4 Power Line 2KV Digi
133. P command RUN STOP ramp to stop and free run to stop Frequency Frequency frequency output stops according to 1 operation decel eration time operation free run to stop command command EF EF When 02 02 is set to 2 0r3 When Pr 02 02 is set to 0 or 1 PVM Carrier Frequency Selections Unit 1 230V 460V Series Power 0 5 to 15hp 0 4kW to 11kW Setting Range 1 to 15 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive 4 54 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 En Chapter 4 Parameters Carrier Acoustic Electromagnetic Heat Current Frequency Noise Noise or leakage pissipation Wave current Significant Minimal Minimal AAS Minimal 8kHz 15kHz Minimal Significant Significant Significant From the table we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise AC motor drive heat dissipation and motor acoustic noise The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT s life Example for 460V models Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz the ambient temperature is 50 degrees C with a single AC motor drive mounting method A If the output current exceeds 80
134. Posizionamento e Tests Stands Macchine di test e e e Embedded PLC Controllers e e Controllo PLC integrato Wire amp Cable Wire Draw Macchine lavorazione filo e e e Tube Mills Rolling Mills Macchine lavorazione tubi e e e metallo Punch Presses Presse e Glass Vetro e Paper Carta e e e Torque Vector Flux Vector Digital DC Vettoriale di coppia Vettoriale di flusso Convertitori Digitali Applications Applicazioni This page intentionally left blank Preface Thank you for choosing GEFRAN s high performance ADV50 Series The ADV50 Series is manufactured with high quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available This manual is to be used for the installation parameter setting troubleshooting and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive To guarantee safe operation of the equipment read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference To ensure the safety of operators and equipment only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation start up and maintenance Always read this manual thoroughly before using ADV50 series AC Motor Drive especially the WARNING DANGER and CAUTION notes Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage If you have any questi
135. Setting 0 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 4 102 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Motor Pole Number Motor 2 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Motor No load Current Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA Torque Compensation Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Factory Setting 0 0 07 35 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 0736 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 0 to 65535 mQ Factory Setting 0 0737 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 20 00Hz Factory Setting 3 00 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 Unit 1 Settings 2 to 10 Factory Setting 4 E The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi function input terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 to 27 and 28 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 103 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 8 Special Parameters ETE DC Braking Current Level Unit 1 Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 0 This parameter sets the level of DC Braking Current output to the motor during start up stopping When setting DC Braking Current the Rated Current Pr 00 01 is regarded as 100 It is recommended to start with a l
136. TL V2 11 D 3 Appendix D CANopen Function Object Function Code Node Number COB ID Object Dictionary Index TPDO1 0011 1 127 0x181 0x1FF 0x1800 RPDO1 0100 1 127 0x201 0x27F 0x1400 TPDO2 0101 1 127 0x281 Ox2FF 0x1801 RPDO2 0110 1 127 0x301 0x37F 0x1401 TPDOS3 0111 1 127 0x381 Ox3FF 0x1802 RPDO3 1000 1 127 0x401 0x47F 0x1402 TPDO4 1001 1 127 0x481 Ox4FF 0x1803 RPDO4 1010 1 127 0x501 0x57F 0x1403 Default SDO tx 1011 1 127 0x581 0x5FF 0x1200 Default SDO rx 1100 1 127 0x601 0x67F 0x1200 NMT Error 1110 1 127 0x701 0x77F 0x1016 0x1017 Control D 1 4 CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows NMT Network Management Object W SDO Service Data Object W PDO Process Data Object m EMCY Emergency Object D 1 4 1 NMT Network Management Object The Network Management NMT follows a Master Slave structure for executing NMT service Only one NMT master is in a network and other nodes are regarded as slaves All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes The state diagram of a node are shown as follows ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 4 Initializing Appendix D CANopen Function 9 2 Enter pre operational state automatically 3 6 Start remote node 4 7 Enter pre operatio
137. The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action Communication time out 10 If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 3 7 Communication program of PC The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language include lt stdio h gt include lt dos h gt include lt conio h gt include lt process h gt define PORT 0x03F8 the address of COM1 the address offset value relative to COM1 define THR 0x0000 define RDR 0x0000 define BRDL 0x0000 define IER 0x0001 define BRDH 0x0001 define LCR 0x0003 define MCR 0x0004 define LSR 0 0005 define MSR 0 0006 unsigned char rdat 60 read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 unsigned char tdat 60 0 1 0 3 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 2 D 7 r An void main int i outportb PORT MCR 0x08 interrupt enable outportb PORT IER 0x01 interrupt as data in outportb PORT LCR inportb PORT LCR 0x80 the BRDL BRDH can be access as LCR b7 1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 129 Chapter 4 Parameters outportb PORT BRDL 12 set baudrate 9600 12 115200 9600 outportb PORT BRDH 0x00 outportb PORT LCR 0x06 set protocol lt 7 N 2 gt 06H lt 7
138. U WRITE failure cF1 1 Contrsol Board CPU READ failure cF2 1 ACI signal error AErr Reserved Motor PTC overheat protection PtC1 Reserved Communication time out error of control board and power board CP10 co 4 96 In Pr 06 08 to Pr 06 12 the five most recent faults that occurred are stored After removing the cause of the fault use the reset command to reset the drive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 7 Motor Parameters Motor Rated Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 30 FLA to 120 FLA Factory Setting FLA Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter Motor Current AC Drive Current x 100 with Motor Current Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current Rated current of AC drive in A see Pr 00 01 En Pr 07 00 and Pr 07 01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode Pr 00 10 1 They also must be set if the Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Pr 06 06 or Slip Compensation Pr 07 03 functions are selected X Motor No load Current Motor 0 Unit 1 Settings 0 FLA to 90 FLA Factory Setting 0 4 FLA The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100 The setting of the Motor no load current will affect the slip compensation E The setting value must be less than Pr 07 00 Motor Rated Current A Torque Compensation Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0 Fact
139. V50 is a program editor of Gefran ADV50 series for WINDOWS Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions such as cut paste copy multi windows Soft PLC ADV50 also provides various Chinese English comment editing and other special functions e g register editing settings the data readout the file saving and contacts monitor and set etc Following is the system requirement for Soft PLC ADV50 Item Operation System CPU Memory Hard Disk Monitor Mouse Printer RS 232 port Applicable Models System Requirement Windows 95 98 2000 NT ME XP Pentium 90 and above 16MB and above 32MB and above is recommended Capacity 50MB and above CD ROM for installing Soft PLC ADV50 Resolution 640x480 16 colors and above It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800x600 General mouse or the device compatible with Windows Printer with Windows driver At least one of COM1 to 8 can be connected to PLC Gefran ADV50 series ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 2 Start up C 2 1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC function by the following five steps 1 Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download upload A Go to PLCO page by pressing the MODE key B Change to PLC2 by pressing the UP key and then press the ENTER key after confirmation C If succeeded END is displayed and back to PLC2 after one or two second
140. Wiring Aim A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive 2 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation wiring and commissioning 3 Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock 2 1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS 485 communication port or permanent damage may result Pins 1 amp 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS 485 communication 2 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 1 for models of ADV50 Series ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF Praking resistor i i optional me unit optional Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker lt o uri S L2 O O S L2 V T2 0 i Recommended Circuit i when power supply is turned OFF bya Multi function contact output 240Vac 2 5A Max RB 120Vac 5A Max x F 28Vdc 5AMax RC Factory setting is 24V malfunction indication
141. a Program Example The 16 bit DO is multiplied by the 16 bit D10 and brings forth a 32 bit product The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16 bit are stored in D20 On Off of the most left bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value API Mnemonic Operands Function 23 DIV P 1 S2 D Division ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 54 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y H KnY KnM T C D DIV DIVP 7 steps 5 alls S all a D e elle le Operands S4 Dividend Sz Divisor D Quotient and remainder Explanations 1 In 16 bit instruction D occupies 2 consecutive devices 2 This instruction divides S4 and S in BIN format and stores the result in D Be careful with the positive negative signs of S1 S and D when doing 16 bit and 32 bit operations 16 bit instruction Quotient Remainder G2 CD CDD 1 ian 500 615 500 615 bOO 515 b00 Program Example When On 00 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21 On Off of the highest bit indicates the positive negative status of the result value H DIV D10 020 DIV D10 K4YO
142. a motor in both forward and reverse direction The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid point of its scale Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls 4 72 Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 50 0 Bias adjustment Pr 04 01 1 Negative bias Pr 04 02 200 Input gain Pr 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled Gain 10V 5V 100 200 Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 200 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Example 8 Use negative slope In this example the use of negative slope is shown Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure temperature or flow The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal 10V at high pressure or flow With negative slope settings the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction reverse This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 100 Bias adjustment 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain 04 03 1 Negative bias REV motion enabled negative slope Gain 10V 10V 100 100 OHz ov 10 Bias adjustment 60Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 100 Minimum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Minimum AVI Fr
143. ameter Pr 01 09 Pr 01 12 Auto acceleration deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor In applications with brake resistor or brake unit Auto deceleration shall not be used Acceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Deceleration S Curve Unit 0 1 0 01 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 0 S curve disabled 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 S curve enabled 10 0 10 00 is the smoothest This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S curve The S curve is disabled when set to 0 0 and enabled when set to 0 1 to 10 0 0 01 to 10 00 Setting 0 1 0 01 gives the quickest and setting 10 0 10 00 the longest and smoothest S curve The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel Decel Times in Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel Decel Time is only for reference when the S curve is enabled The actual Accel Decel Time depends on the selected S curve 0 1 to 10 0 The total Accel Time Pr 01 09 Pr 01 17 or Pr 01 11 Pr 01 17 The total Decel Time Pr 01 10 Pr 01 18 or Pr 01 12 Pr 01 18 kos o o Disable S curve Enable S curve Acceleration deceleration Characteristics ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 47 Chapter 4 Parameters 01 20 01 21 01 22 01 23 01 24 01 25 Delay Time at OHz for Simple Posi
144. and Selection for 02 14 keypad d 1 by Zero Freq Command RS485 USB 2 by Frequency Display at Stop Initial Frequency 02 15 Setpoint for keypad 0 00 600 0Hz 60 00 amp RS485 USB Read Only Display the Master BitO 1 by First Freq Source Pr 02 00 02 16 Freq Command Bit1 1 by Second Freq Source Pr 02 09 THE Source Bit2 1 by Multi input function Bit3 1 by PLC Freq command Read Only BitO 1 by Digital Keypad Display the Bit1 1 by RS485 communication 02 17 Operation Command Source Bit2 1 by External Terminal 2 3 wire mode Bit3 1 by Multi input function Bit4 1 by PLC Operation Command Group 3 Output Function Parameters Factory No function Multi function AC drive operational 03 00 Output Relay RA1 RB1 RC1 Master frequency attained Zero speed Over torque detection Multi function Base Block B B indication 03 01 Output Terminal MO1 Low voltage indication Operation mode indication ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 9 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 8 Fault indication 9 Desired frequency attained 10 Terminal count value attained 11 Preliminary count value attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat sink overheat warning Over Voltage supervision PID supervision Forward command Reverse command Zero speed output signal Warning FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE SAvE Brake control Desired frequency attained 22 Drive ready 23
145. and Pr 01 06 are disabled 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 120 0 Factory Setting 110 0 Ea This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit Pr 01 08 The Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 is regarded as 10096 E Output Frequency Upper Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 07 100 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 43 Chapter 4 Parameters 01 08 Output Frequency Voltage Lower Limit 01 07 Output Frequency Upper Limit 01 02 2 i Maximum i Output 1 Voltage i 01 04 Mid point f Voltage i Thelimitof Output Frequency 01 06 Frequency 1 05 01 03 01 01 01 00 Uo pu Minimum Mid point Maximum Voltage Maximum oltage Output Freq Frequency Output Freq Base Frequency Frequency Curve Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 The Upper Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz the Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz the Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 is set to 1 0Hz then any Command Frequency between 1 0 10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive This parameter mu
146. and selection keypad 20 Operation command selection communication 21 FWD REV command 22 Source of second frequency command 23 Run Stop PLC Program PLC1 24 Download execute monitor PLC Program PLC2 25 Simple position function 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 BitO MI1 Bit1 MI2 Bit2 MI3 Bit3 MI4 Bit4 MI5 Bit5 MIG Multi function Input 04 09 Contact Selection Bit7 MI8 Bit8 MI9 Bit9 MI10 Bit10 MI11 Bit11 MI12 0 N O 1 N C P S MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3 wire control Digital Terminal 04 10 Input Debouncing 1 to 20 2ms 1 Time 0441 Min Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V Loo 04 12 Min AVI Frequency 9 0 to 100 0 Loo f ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 13 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 04 13 Max AVI Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V 04 14 Max AVI Frequency 0 0 to 100 096 100 0 04 15 Min ACI Current 0 0 to 20 0mA 4o 04 16 Min ACI Frequency 9 0 to 100 0 oo 04 17 Max ACI Current 0 0 to 20 0mA 04 18 Max ACI Frequency 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 0 0 0421 Min AVI2 Frequency 0 0 to 100 0 0422 2 Voltage 0 0 to 10 0V 4 Max AVI2 Read only Bit021 MI1 used by PLC Bit121 MI2 used by PLC Bit2 1 MI3 used by PLC Bit321 MI4 used by PLC The Digital Input Bit4 1 MI5 used by PLC Used by PLC Bit5 1 MI6 used by PLC Bit6 1 MI7 used by PLC Bit7 1 MI8 used by PLC Bit8 1 MI9 used by PLC Bit9 1 used
147. and source is external terminal 2 3wire Weights Bit The Setting method It needs to convert binary number 6 bit to decimal number for input For example if setting MI5 MI6 to be N C and MI2 MIA to be The setting value Pr 04 09 should be bit5X2 bit4X2 bit2X27 1 2 1 2 1 2 32 16 4 52 as shown in the following ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 81 Chapter 4 Parameters 5 4 3 2 y Weights 2 2 2 2 2 Bit 2 MIS Theseting valve NOTE bit4x2 bit2x2 2 16384 2 8192 2 4096 2 2048 2 1024 ziii 2 512 2 256 2 128 20 64 25 32 Setting 04 09 2 16 2 8 2 4 22 24 When extension is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows OzN O Weights 2 270 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 N C Bit 04 10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Unit 2ms Settings 1 to 20 Factory Setting 1 This parameter is to delay the signals digital input terminals 1 unit is 2 msec 2 units are 4 msec etc The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction 4 82 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Digital Input Used by PLC Settings Read Only Factory setting Display BitO 1 used by PLC Bit1
148. anghai Ph 86 21 5866 7816 Ph 86 21 5866 1555 gefransh online sh cn GEFRAN SIEI DRIVES TECHNOLOGY No 1265 B1 Hong De Road Jia Ding District 201821 Shanghai Ph 86 21 69169898 Fax 86 21 69169333 infoG gefransiei com cn 156025 Rev 1 0 3 9 2008 Manuale ADV50 FP EN
149. apter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 6 1 Fault Code Information cccccccccsseseeceeececeaeeaseeeeeeeseaueaeeeeeeeeeaneass 6 1 6 1 1 Common Problems and 6 1 6 1 2 Reset eme en eer e EE ID 6 5 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections ss em 6 5 Appendix A Specifications esses nnne nnne A 1 Appendix B Accessories eene enne nnne nnnm nnn B 1 B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives B 1 B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors B 4 B 2 Non fuse Circuit Breaker Chart B 6 Fuse Specification B 7 Bid AC 2 5 eter HUI E ene Ini ene Ii Pede Reed B 8 B 4 1 AC Input Reactor Recommended B 8 B 4 2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value B 8 B 4 3 Applications ect etie e etd B 9 B 5 Zero Phase Reactor 20 50 B 12 B 6 MEMORY KB ADV20 50 ssssssssssseeene nennen B 15 B 6 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KB ADV20 50 B 15 B 6 2 Explanation of Display B 15 B 6 3 Operation Flow
150. ated when the Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power silicon rectifier switches on off These spikes may damage the mains circuit Correct wiring power Silicon Controlled Rectifier reactor reactor ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 l AC motor drive E t lt Appendix B Accessories Application 3 Question Used to improve the input power factor to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances surges switching spikes short interruptions etc The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500 or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity or the mains wiring distance lt 10m When the mains power capacity is too large line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high This may damage motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature Correct wiring large capacity power reactor o XN CY Y SY ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 small capacity AC motor drive E B 11 Appendix B Accessories B 5 Zero Phase Reactor RF OUT ADV20 50 Dimensions are in millimeter and inch Recommended Wire Cable Size Wirin type Qty Method Note AWG mm Nominal Diagram Di Please put all wires through
151. atus LEDs master frequency output frequency output current custom units parameter values for setup and lock faults RUN STOP RESET FWD REV PLC ADV50 2015 XXX 2MF ADV50 2022 XXX 2M F 2T 4 F ADV50 2022 XXX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XXX 2T 4 FADV50 2037 XXX 2T 4F ADV50 3055 XXX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XXX 2T 4 F ADV50 3075 XXX 2T 4F ADV50 3110 XXX 4 F ADV50 3110 XXX 4F For 230V 1 phase and 400 460V 3 phase models IP20 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Installation Location Altitude 1 000 m or lower keep from corrosive gasses liquid and dust s Ambient Temperature 10 C to 50 C 40 C for i ios mounting Non Condensing and not rozen Storage Transportation 20 C to 60 C Temperature Ambient Humidity Below 9096 RH non condensing 9 80665m s 1G less than 20Hz 5 88m s 0 6G at 20 to 50Hz CE O We Approvals ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 A 3 Appendix A Specifications This page intentionally left blank A 4 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 1 All Brake Resistors amp Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note Please only use GEFRAN resistors and recommended values Other resistors and values will void Gefran s warranty Please contact your nearest Gefran representative for use of special resistors The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference Refer to the
152. aud rate 19200bps Baud rate 38400bps Warn and keep operating 09 02 Transmission Fault Warn and ramp to stop 3 Treatment Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating 0 1 120 0 seconds 09 03 Time out Detection 0 0 Disable N 09 04 Communication 0 7 N 2 Modbus ASCII Protocol 1 7 E 1 Modbus ASCII ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 23 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 09 05 09 06 09 07 4 24 Reserved Reserved 7 0 1 Modbus ASCII 8 N 2 Modbus RTU 8 E 1 Modbus RTU 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII 2 3 4 5 8 0 1 Modbus RTU 6 7 8 Response Delay 0 200 unit 2ms Time Transmission Speed for USB Card Communication Protocol for USB Card Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Baud rate 4800 bps Baud rate 9600 bps Baud rate 19200 bps Baud rate 38400 bps Baud rate 57600 bps 7 N 2 for ASCII 7 E 1 for ASCII 7 0 1 for ASCII 8 N 2 for 8 E 1 for RTU 8 0 1 for 8 N 1 Modbus RTU 8 E 2 Modbus RTU 8 0 2 Modbus RTU 9 7 N 1 Modbus ASCII 10 7 E 2 Modbus ASCII 11 7 0 2 Modbus ASCII gt OTF WN BAO 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and ramp to stop 2 Warn and coast to stop 3 No warning and keep operating i ADV50 SW PW V1 1
153. blems and Solutions Fault Name Fault Descriptions Over current a m Abnormal increase in current Over voltage _ The DC bus voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Corrective Actions Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power Check the wiring connections to U T1 V T2 W T3 for possible short circuits Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits also to ground Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor Increase the Acceleration Time Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a short circuit is removed and the other points above are checked it should be sent back to manufacturer Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range Check for possible voltage transients DC bus over voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration Either increase the Decel Time or add an optional brake resistor and brake unit Check whether the required braking power is within the specified limits 6 1 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Fault m Name Fault Descriptions Overheating Heat sink temperature too high Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value Overl
154. ci A7K R1 Retc1 47K Warning level 07 16 V 10 2 47 R1 Retc2 47K Definition V 10 voltage between 10V ACM Range 10 4 11 2VDC RPTC1 motor PTC overheat protection level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 14 RPTC2 motor PTC overheat warning level Corresponding voltage level set in Pr 07 15 47kQ is AVI input impedance R1 resistor divider recommended value 1 20kQ the standard thermistor as example if protection level is 13300 the voltage between 10V ACM is 10 5V and resistor divider R1 is 4 4kQ Refer to following calculation for Pr 07 14 setting 1330 47000 1330 47000 1330 47000 1293 4 10 5 1293 4 4400 1293 4 2 38 V 2 4 V Therefore Pr 07 14 should be set to 2 4 resistor value Q 1330 temperature C 5 5 07 15 Motor Overheat Warning Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 1 2 07 16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 5 0V Factory Setting 0 6 treatment of the motor PTC Overheat Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 101 Chapter 4 Parameters If temperature exceeds the motor DL ee warning level Pr 07 15 the drive will act according to Pr 07 17 and display t If the temperature decreases below the result Pr 07 15 minus Pr
155. communication address specified by Pr 09 00 The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address ETE Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting 1 Ea If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS 485 serial communication the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique 0901 Transmission Speed Factory Setting 1 0 Baud rate 4800 bps bits second 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps Settings Ea This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master PLC PC etc and AC motor drive 09 02 A Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting 3 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating Settings Ea This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur Ea See list of error messages below see section 3 6 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 113 Chapter 4 Parameters M Time out Detection Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable Ca If Pr 09 03 is not equal to 0 0 Pr 09 02 0 2 and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period set by Pr 09 03 cE10 will be shown on the keypad 09 04 A Communication Protocol Factory
156. cy is at the 03 00 03 01 General application Provide a signal for running status desired frequency by frequency command a signal is given for external system or control wiring frequency attained ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 35 Chapter 4 Parameters Output Signal for Base Block ee i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters A Provide a signal for When executing Base Block a signal 03 00 03 01 General application is given for external system control running status wiring Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Soy 5 Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When heat sink is overheated it will 03 00 03 01 General application For safety send a signal for external system or control wiring Multi function Analog Output TAN y Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The value of frequency output 03 06 General application Display running status current voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage current meter 4 36 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0 User Parameters A This parameter can be set during operation A This parameter can be set during operation ETE Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory setting 0001 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive Settings Read Only Factory s
157. d 1 Speed search starts with last frequency 1 Search command 2 Starts with minimum output frequency 08 07 B B Time for Speed 9 4 to 5 0 sec 0 5 Search Current Limit for 5 08 09 Skip Frequency 1 9 00 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 0840 Skip Frequency 1 9 99 to 600 0 Hz Lower Limit 0811 Skip Frequency 2 4 99 to 600 0 Hz Upper Limit 08 12 Skip Frequency 99 to 600 0 Hz Lower Limit 9 Frequency 3 0 00 to 600 0 Hz pper Limit Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit 0 00 to 600 0 Hz 0 00 Auto Restart After to 10 0 disable 0 Fault 08 16 Auto Reset Time at 0 1 to 6000 sec Restart after Fault 0 Disable Auto Energy Saving 1 Enable 08 18 AVR Function 0 AVR function enable 1 AVR function disable 2 AVR function disable for decel 4 22 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Setting Pf 3 AVR function disable for stop 230V series 370 0to 430 0V 380 0 T m o lt Software Braking 08 19 Level 460V series 740 0 to 860 0V 760 0 Compensation 0 0 5 0 08 20 Coefficient for Motor Instability 08 21 Sampling Time 0 1 to 120 0 sec 1 0 08 22 Number of OOB 00 to 32 20 Sampling Times OOB Average Read only DEB Function 0 Disable 08 24 DEB Return Time 1 Enable 08 25 Sampling Time 0 to 250 sec Group 9 Communication Parameters 1 Factory Communication Baud rate 4800bps Baud rate 9600bps 409 01 Transmission Speed 1 B
158. d if this parameter value 19 is set See the Keypad explanation below this table Operation ON Operation command via Communication Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 20 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Pr 02 01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set See the Communication explanation below this table This function has top priority to set the direction for running If 21 Forward Reverse 02 04 0 Used to select the first second frequency command source Refer Source of second to pr 92 00 and 02 09 22 frequency ON 2nd Frequency command source command enabled OFF 1st Frequency command source ON Run PLC Program OFF Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC 28 Run Stop PLC program When this function is disabled it will display PLCO in the 4 142 Program PLC page and stop executing PLC program The motor will be stopped by Pr 02 02 When operation command source is external terminal the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status And this function will be invalid when AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download execute monitor PLC When this function is disabled it Download Execute
159. drive protection not for protection of the user 1 i 2 i i i output line Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive Check if the regenerative energy is too large Load may have changed suddenly Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins Check if the communication protocol address transmission speed etc are properly set Use the correct checksum calculation Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information coo E Software protection failure Please contact Gefran Technical Assistance BEe Analog signal error Check the wiring of ACI 1 PID feedback signal error 2 Check parameter settings Pr 10 01 and AVI ACI wiring Check for possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time Pr 10 08 Check input phase wiring for loose contacts error on the control board or power board 2 Motor overheat protection PLE PG signal error 6 4 Auto Tuning Error x Communication time out 1 Check cabling between drive and motor Retry again Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting Please contact Gefran Technical Assistance Check if the motor is overheat Check Pr 07 12 to Pr 07 17 settings Check the wiring of PG card Try another PG card ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 2 R
160. e Vmax Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 3 Chapter 4 Parameters Mid Point Frequency 01 03 Fmid Motor 0 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Mid Point Voltage 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V Vmid MotorO 460v series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin 0 10 to 600 0 Hz 1 50 Motor 0 Minimum Output 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 10 0 Voltage Vmin Motor 0 460V series 0 1V to 510 0V 20 0 01 07 Output Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 110 0 Upper Limit Output Frequency 0 0 100 0 01 08 Lower Limit 0 0 401 13 Jog Acceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec 1 Time 401 14 Jog Deceleration 0 1 to 600 0 0 01 to 600 0 sec Time 401 15 Jog Frequency 0 10 Hz to Fmax Pr 01 00 Hz 0 Linear Accel Decel 1 Auto Accel Linear Decel Auto acceleration deceleration refer 2 Linear Accel Auto Decel to Accel Decel time setting 3 Auto Accel Decel Set by load 4 Auto Accel Decel set by Accel Decel Time setting 01 17 Acceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec Curve 01 18 Deceleration S 0 0 to 10 0 0 00 to 10 00 sec Curve Accel Decel Time 0 Unit 0 1 sec 01 19 Unit 1 Unit 0 01 sec Parameter 4 4 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Explanation Delay Time at OHz 01 20 for Simple Position Delay Time at 10Hz 01 21 for Simple Position Delay Time at 20Hz 01 22 for Simple Position Delay Time at 30H 01 23 for Simple Position Delay Time at 40Hz 01
161. e therefore it calls Top priority of start priority of stop 2 rst Y1 It is top priority of start when SET command is set after 1 ml RST command When X1 and X2 act at the same SET Y1 time Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start W The common control circuit Example 4 condition control X1 x3 HI li GD dE T X2 1 2 4 1 I 1 1 2 iiie EL Y2 uL eL Y2 X1 and X3 can start stop Y1 separately X2 and X4 can start stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series Therefore Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 15 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Example 5 Interlock control X1 X3 Y2 Y1 Y2 The figure above is the circuit of interlock control Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2 Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time once one of them acts and the other won t act This is called interlock Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time Y1 and Y2 won t act at the same time due to up to down scan of ladder diagram For this ladder diagram Y1 has higher priority than Y2 Example 6 Sequential Control x1 TA If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND M function as shown in the left side Y1 is an
162. e OUT command All turned OFF Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition Application commands All of them are not acted but the nest loop FOR NEXT command will still be executed for times defined by users even though the MC MCR commands is OFF 2 MCR is the main control ending command that is placed at the end of the main control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command 3 Commands of the MC MCR main control program supports the nest program structure with 8 layers as its greatest Please use the commands in order from NO N7 and refer to the following Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT YO Drive YO coil LD Load contact of X2 JL MC N1 Enable N1 common series MCR connection contact AL LD Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MCR N1 Disable N1 common series connection contact MCR MCR NO Disable NO common series ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 connection contact LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC NO Enable NO common series connection contact 41 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil MCR NO Disable NO common series connection contact Mnemonic Function LDP Rising edge d
163. e communication address of EXP CAN ADV20 50 as 26 1AH simply switch ID H to 1 and ID L to A Switch Setting Content 0 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B 9 4 4 LED Indicator Explanation amp Troubleshooting There are 3 LED indicators RUN ERROR and SP on EXP CAN ADV20 50 to indicate the communication status of EXP CAN ADV20 50 RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on EXP CAN ADV20 50 card Single Flash STOPPED EXP CAN ADV20 50 is in STOPPED Green state une isnt PRE Green ON OPERATIONAL ected pried is in the Red ON Configuration error Node ID or Baud rate setting error ERROR LED EXP CAN ADV20 50 is working OFF No error a condition ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 31 Appendix B Accessories LED Status Indication At least one of error counter of the Single Flash CANopen controller has reached Red arning rit reacne exceeded the warning level too many error frames Double Flash E t A guard event or heartbeat event has Red rror control even ceurred Red ON The CANopen controller is bus off SP LED OFF No power on EXP CAN ADV20 50 card LED Blinking Check your communication setting in Red CRE cheer emer ADV50 drives 19200 8 N 2 RTU 1 Check the connection between ADV50 drive and EXP CAN Red ON Connection failure No ADV20 50 card is correct connection 2 Re wire the ADV
164. e number uses octal Internal relay The internal relay doesn t connect directly to outside It is an auxiliary relay in PLC Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit It can be driven by the contact of input relay output relay or other internal equipment Its contacts can be used unlimitedly Internal auxiliary relay can t output directly it should output with output point c Equipment indication MO M1 M4 M159 The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system Timer Timer is used to control time There are coil contact and timer storage When coil is ON its contact will act contact a is close contact b is open when attaining desired time The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period Once the coil is OFF the contact won t act contact a is open and contact b is close and the timer will be set to zero c Equipment indication TO 1 15 The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system The different number range corresponds with the different timing period Counter Counter is used to count It needs to set counter before using counter i e the pulse of counter There are coil contacts and storage unit of counter in counter When coil is from OFF to ON that means input a pulse
165. e position of the control terminals Terminals 1 AFM MCM MOT Terminals 2 2222222222222 MI2 5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V RS 485 port Frame Control Terminals Torque Wire Terminals 1 5 kgf cm 4 4 in Ibf 12 24 AWG 3 3 0 2mm A Terminals 2 2 kgf cm 1 7 in Ibf 16 24 AWG 1 3 0 2mm 2 18 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Frame A ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 4F ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F Frame ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 4F Frame C ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3110 XBX 4F ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 19 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring This page intentionally left blank 2 20 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Make sure that the wiring is correct In particular check that the output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 are NOT connected to power CAUTION and that the drive is well grounded W Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive W Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands W Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KB ADV50 W t should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to Fault Code Information and Maintenance for solution Please do WARNING NOT touch output terminals U V
166. e result into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation x1 x1 Load contact A of X1 IH Connect to contact of in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OR Parallel connection A contact X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v v Y Explanations The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 33 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of x1 OR x1 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel OUT Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORI Parallel connection B contact X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 0 7 00 029 v v v Y Explanations The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts thereafter saving the result into the accumulative register
167. e time only the same power system can be connected in parallel Power 208 220 230 380 440 480 depend on models For frame A terminal is connected to the terminal of the braking module For frame B and terminal 1 is connected to the terminal of the braking module 1 3 Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeter and inch w1 Frame wi H H1 D D A 72 0 2 83 60 0 2 36 142 0 5 59 120 0 4 72 152 0 5 98 5 2 0 04 7 6 0 06 B 100 0 3 94 89 0 3 50 174 0 6 86 162 0 6 38 152 0 5 98 5 5 0 22 9 3 0 36 C 130 0 5 12 116 0 4 57 260 0 10 24 246 5 9 70 169 2 6 66 5 510 22 9 8 0 38 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Dra Frame A ADV50 1004 XXX 2MF 4F ADV50 1007 XXX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 1015 XXX 2T 4F Frame B ADV50 2015 XBX 2MF ADV50 2022 XBX 2MF 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 4F Frame C ADV50 3055 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4T ADV50 3110 XBX 4F 1 12 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover check if the power and control terminals are clear Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring W General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All ADV50 series a
168. ed i i Master Frequency 2 EV 1 Oto 10V 47K 2 3 GND ACI Ur ACI ACI AVI switch i 4 20 0 10 amp When switching to AVI O ACM 8 lt 1 7 it indicates AVI2 Ed Analog Signal Common Lor add 8 Reserved O Main circuit power terminals 2 6 O Control circuit terminals 1 Shielded leads amp Cable ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 5 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A NPN mode without external power NPN 1 Factory setting B NPN mode with external power NPN 24 NY PNP Factory setting C PNP mode without external power NPN Visi PNP Factory setting ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Multi step3 o Multi step 4 o C 24V FWD STOP oco REV STOP MI2 Multi step 1 MI3 Multi step 2 5 5 MIA Digital Signal Common FWD STOP O O REV STOP Multi step 1 55 i Multi step 2 Multi step3 Multi 4 ulti step 55 FWD STOP o o REV STOP Multi step 1 55 Multi step 2 5 Multi step 3 55 Multi step 4 2 7 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring D PNP mode with external power NPN s PNP FWD STOP o O REV STOP o O6 Multi step 1 Factory o o setting Multi st
169. ed Circuit pem iue MO Y1 aT 1 1 1 Mo h ji MO Y1 y1 In figure above the rising edge differential command of will make coil MO to have a single pulse of AT a scan time Y1 will be ON during this scan time In the next scan time coil MO will be OFF normally close MO and normally close Y1 are all closed However coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising edge comes after input and coil MO is ON for a scan time The timing chart is as shown above This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input From above timing when input XO is a square wave of a period T output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 17 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Example 10 Delay Circuit ir TB 7 0 1 sec 100 seconds When input is ON output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds K1000 0 1 seconds 7100 seconds once input is OFF and T10 is ON Please refer to timing chart above Example 11 Output delay circuit in the following example the circuit is made up of two timers No matter input is ON or OFF output Y4 will be delay it eo T5 T6 5 seconds D Y4 Y4 gt I 4 3 seconds Example12 Extend Timer Circui
170. ed external cooling 2 2 Disabled 0 0 0 No fault 0 Disabled 1 Enabled during constant speed operation After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Enabled during constant speed operation After the over torque is detected stop running 3 Enabled during accel After the over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs Over current oc Over voltage ov Overheat 1 Power Board Overheat 0H2 Overload oL Overload1 oL 1 Motor over load oL2 External fault EF Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 4 17 Chapter 4 Parameters 1 Factory 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground fault GFF 13 Reserved 14 Phase Loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto Acel Decel failure CFA 06 10 Third Most Recent 17 SW Password protection codE Fault Record 18 Power Board CPU WRITE failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 06 11 Fourth Most Recent 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 Fault Record 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF4 24 U phase error cF3 0 Seia Fifth Most Recent 25 V phase error cF3 1 Fault Record 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4
171. eference values The max frequencies are based on Pr 01 00 during open loop control as shown in the following 04 14 04 18 04 23 04 12 04 16 04 21 analog input 20mA 10V 4 74 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 01 00 60 00 Hz 04 14 70 04 18 50 04 12 30 Chapter 4 Parameters 04 16 0 04 11 0V 04 15 4mA gt analog input 04 13 10V 04 17 20 Multi function Input Terminal MI2 2 wire 3 wire Operation Control Modes Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP 1 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 2 3 wire Operation Ea There are three different types of control modes External Terminal 04 04 2 wire 0 FWD STOP REV STOP 2 wire 1 FWD REV RUN STOP ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 FWD STOP REV STOP RUN STOP FWD REV MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE FWD MI2 OPEN STOP CLOSE REV DCM MI1 OPEN STOP CLOSE RUN MI2 OPEN FWD CLOSE REV DCM 4 75 Chapter 4 Parameters External Terminal 04 04 STOP RUN EM MI1 CLOSE RUN MI3 OPEN STOP MI2 OPEN FWD CLOSE REV REV FWD DCM Multi function Input Terminal MI3 Factory Setting 1 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal Factory Setting 2 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Factory Setting 3 04 08 Multi function Input Terminal MI
172. ency Pr 01 01 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 4 42 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea This parameter sets the Mid Point Voltage of any V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point Frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage Pr 01 06 and equal to or less than Maximum Output Voltage Pr 01 02 E This setting should be greater than Pr 01 06 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 En This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 Ea The settings of 01 03 01 04 and 01 06 are invalid in Vector Control mode Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 E The settings of Pr 01 01 to Pr 01 06 have to meet the condition of Pr 01 02 gt Pr 01 04 gt Pr 01 06 and Pr 01 01 gt Pr 01 03 gt Pr 01 05 Ea In vector control mode Pr 00 10 is set to 1 Pr 01 03 Pr 01 04
173. ep 2 Multi step 3 o Multi step 4 o 2 8 The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled off net in front of the terminal Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage The AC motor drive motor and wiring may cause interference To prevent the equipment damage please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment When the AC drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 respectively To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation switch over any of the two motor leads With long motor cables high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over current high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy To prevent this the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3 7kW models and below And the cable should be less than 50m for 5 5kW models and above For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor The AC motor drive electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible
174. eps Jog motopotentiometer Set by RUN and STOP 2 wires 3 wires MI1 MI2 MI3 JOG operation RS 485 serial interface MODBUS programmable logic controller Multi step selection 0 to 15 Jog accel decel inhibit 2 accel decel switches counter external Base Block ACI AVI selections driver reset UP DOWN key settings NPN PNP input selection AC drive operating frequency attained zero speed Base Block fault indication overheat alarm emergency stop and status selections of input terminals Output frequency current Contact will be On when drive malfunctions 1 Form C change over contact and 1 open collector output for standard type Built in PLC AVR accel decel S Curve over voltage over current stall prevention 5 fault records reverse inhibition momentary power loss restart DC braking auto torque slip compensation auto tuning adjustable carrier frequency output frequency limits parameter lock reset vector control PID control external counter MODBUS communication abnormal reset abnormal re start power saving fan control sleep wake frequency 1st 2nd frequency source selections 1st 2nd frequency source combination NPN PNP selection parameters for motor 0 to motor 3 DEB and OOB Out Of Balance Detection for washing machine Over voltage over current under voltage external fault overload ground fault overheating electronic thermal IGBT short circuit PTC 6 key 7 segment LED with 4 digit 5 st
175. equency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 EXE Maximum AVI Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 04 15 Minimum ACI Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 Minimum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 04 17 Maximum ACI Current Unit 0 01 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum ACI Frequency percentage of Pr 01 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Terminal Mode Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 ACI 1 AVI2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 73 Chapter 4 Parameters Minimum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 Minimum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 04 22 Maximum AVI2 Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Maximum AVI2 Frequency percentage of Pr 1 00 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 Ea Please note the ACI AVI switch on the AC motor drive Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal ACI Pr 04 19 should be set to 0 and AVI for analog voltage signal AVI2 Pr 04 19 should be set to 1 The above parameters used to set the analog input r
176. er 5 Troubleshooting 5 13 Electromagnetic Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive Of course there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive But this has its limits Therefore solving it from the outside as follows will be the best 1 Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges 2 Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring 3 Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length 4 The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently i e not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment 5 Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit In short solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of no product disconnect disturbing equipment no spread limit emission for disturbing equipment and no receive enhance immunity 5 14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device you should comply with the environmental conditions Here are some remedial measures if necessary 1 To prevent vibration the use of anti vibrati
177. erform the function once it is connected Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications B 9 1 5 LEDs Display 1 SP Green LED means in normal condition Red LED means abnormal condition 2 Module Green blinking LED means no data transmission Green steady LED means data transmission OK Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal 3 Network Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal Red LED means abnormal gt Drama Refer to user manual for detail information Chapter 5 Troubleshooting B 9 2 LonWorks Communication Module EXP LWK ADV20 50 B 9 2 1 Introduction Device EXP LWK ADV20 50 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk EXP LWK ADV20 50 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network No need to set EXP LWK ADV20 50 address This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for EXP LWK ADV 20 50 that is used to communicate with Gefran ADV50 firmware version of ADV50 should conform with EXP LWK ADV20 50 according to the table below via LonWorks Network ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 25 Appendix B Accessories B 9 2 2 Dimensions 72 2 2 84 59 7 2 35 57 3 2 26 6558 34 8 1 37 3 5 0 14 mm inch B 9 2 3 Specifications Power supply 16 30VDC 750mW Communication
178. erminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO1 1 ACO analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO1 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 IE IR IR 10 ACI2 ACO1 ACO2 1 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current Ea This parameter is used to choose analog frequency 0 10Vdc or analog current 4 20mA to correspond to the AC motor drive s output frequency or current 22 Q Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 Ea This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range When 12 21 is set to 0 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output frequency When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the max output frequency Pr 01 00 setting corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA Ea When Pr 12 21 is set to 1 analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive s output current When Pr 12 22 is set to 100 the 2 5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output 10VDC or 20mA ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 147 Chapter 4 Parameters NOTE If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V refer to following formula to set Pr 12 22 Pr 12 22 full scale voltage 10 100 Example When using voltmeter wit
179. eset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault 1 Press Q key on keypad 2 Set external terminal to RESET set one of Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 05 and then set to be ON 3 Send RESET command by communication gt hea Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation 6 2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition and to ensure a long life It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check up of the AC motor drive regularly Daily Inspection Basic check up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are Whether the motors are operating as expected Whether the installation environment is abnormal Whether the cooling system is operating as expected Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation Whether the motors are overheating during operation 9r g d M Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter Periodic Inspection Before the check up always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between
180. eset to Off 2 When 1 is from Off to On counter will count up add 1 3 When counter attains settings K5 CO contact is On and CO setting K5 CO won t accept X1 trigger signal and CO remains K5 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function x1 CNT co K5 co present 1 1 1 co 1 Contacts YO 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter C235 1 Setting range of 32 bit high speed addition subtraction counter is K 2 147 483 648 K2 147 483 647 2 The settings can be positive negative numbers by using constant or data register D special data register D1000 D1044 is not included If using data register D the setting will occupy two continuous data register The total band width of high speed counter that ADV50 supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input C 4 7 Register Types There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following 1 The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN register to STOP or power is off 2 Special Each special register has the special definition and purpose It is used register to save system status error messages monitor state ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 25 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 4 8 Special Auxiliary Relays Special M Function Read R Write W M1000 Normally open contact a contact This contact i
181. et to 14 its display will be updated regularly This update time is set by Pr 13 06 ETE M Speed Feedback Filter Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 2ms Factory Setting 16 This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card ETE X Time for Feedback Signal Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 10 0 sec Factory Setting 1 0 0 0 Disabled This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning see Pr 13 08 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 4 150 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 13 08 Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep operating AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback encoder feedback are abnormal EXE Source of the High speed Counter Factory Setting Read only Settings 0 PG card 1 PLC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 151 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 1 Over Current OC d ocA Over current ocd uring acceleration Over current during deceleration OC Over current Remove short circuit _ 3 or ground fault Check there is any short circuits and g
182. etection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 M0 M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y Y Y Explanations Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising edge into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation XO X1 LDP XO Start rising edge detection H I C n5 AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDF Falling edge detection operation X0 X17 YO Y17 0 159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y A Explanations Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command but the motion is different It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling edge into the accumulative register Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation 1 LDF X0 Start falling edge detection I E Cn AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 42 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Mnemonic Function ANDP Rising edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y Y v Explanations ANDP command is used in the series connec
183. etting E Pr 00 00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive The capacity rated current rated voltage and the max carrier frequency relate to the identity code Users can use the following table to check how the rated current rated voltage and max carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code E Pr 00 01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct 230V Series kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 HP 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 Pr 00 00 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Rated Output Current A 2 5 4 2 7 5 11 0 17 25 33 Max Carrier 45kHz Frequency a 460V Series kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 HP 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 5 10 15 Pr 00 00 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Rated Output Current A 1 5 2 5 4 2 5 5 8 5 13 18 24 Max Carrier 15kHz Frequency 00 02 Parameter Reset Settings 0 1 6 9 10 Factory Setting 0 Parameter can be read written All parameters are read only Clear PLC program All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 37 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records Pr 06
184. etting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency PID Set Point PID enable Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback Q Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 1 0 1 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 4 Settings 0 ACI2 analog current 0 0 20 0mA 1 AVI3 analog voltage 0 0 10 0V Besides parameters settings the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 AVO1 AVO2 IE ACI2 ACO2 12 02 Min AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 0 0 EUN Min AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 0 0 12 04 Max AVI3 Input Voltage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 10 0V Factory Setting 10 0 4 144 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters ETE Max AVI3 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 096 Factory Setting 100 0 1208 Min ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 4 0 12 07 Min ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 0 0 ETE Max ACI2 Input Current Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 20 0mA Factory Setting 20 0 12 09 ACI2 Scale Percentage Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Setting 100 0 EXE AI2 Function Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings Disabled Source of the 1st frequency
185. f Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is ON o Check if voltage between B1 and is greater than 200VDC for 230V models 400VDC for 460V models res Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise Please contact Gefran Yes ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 No Suitable power transformer capacity Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction Please contact Gefran Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 5 Over Heat OH AC motor drive overheats Heat sink overheats Check if temperature of heat sink No Temperature detection malfunctions s greater than 90 Please contact Gefran Yes v Y Is load too large os Reduce load No Y NN lt If cooling fan functions normally Change cooling fan Yes gt v VY on Yes gt lt Check if cooling fan is jammed Remove obstruction No Check surrounding temperature S Maybe motor drive has malfunction or is within specification gt misoperation due to noise Please contact Gefran Yes Y Adjust surrounding temperature to specification 5 6 Overload OL OL1 OL2 Check fr correct settings at X No Modity setting Yes v Is load too large Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction 9 or misoperation due to noise Yes
186. g 0 00 jaa 4 68 These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals Relay or MO1 when Pr 03 00 03 01 is set to 21 Refer to the following example for details Example 1 Case 1 Pr 03 12 gt Pr 03 11 2 Case 2 Pr 03 12 lt Pr 03 11 Frequency Output Case 1 Pr 03 03 11 2 03 12 12 Run Stop Case 1 MO1 21 Time Case 2 MO1 21 Note 1 setting value of Pr 03 01 P Display the Status of Multi function Output Terminals Settings Read Only Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 RLY Status Status MO2 RA2 Status Status MO4 RA4 Status MOS RAS Status MO6 RA6 Status Factory setting ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Bit7 MO7 RA7 Status For standard AC motor drive without extension card the multi function output terminals are falling edge triggered and Pr 03 13 will display 3 11 for no action 1 49 Q Acti Weights 2 2 O Active 1 Off MO1 If Pr 03 13 displays 2 it means Relay 1 is active For Example The display value 2 bit 1 X 2 When extension card is installed the number of the multi function output terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function output terminals is shown as follows O Active Weights 2 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Off Bit 7 6 5
187. h Step Speed Frequency A 6th Step Speed Frequency MN Tth Step Speed Frequency A 8th Step Speed Frequency A 9th Step Speed Frequency A 10th Step Speed Frequency M 11th Step Speed Frequency A 12th Step Speed Frequency A 13th Step Speed Frequency A 14th Step Speed Frequency A 15th Step Speed Frequency Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 The Multi function Input Terminals refer to Pr 04 05 to 04 08 used to select of the AC motor drive Multi step speeds The speeds frequencies are determined by Pr 05 00 to 05 14 as shown in the following ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 89 Chapter 4 Parameters Multi function 4 90 Frequency 05 12 JOG Freq 01 15 Run Stop 1 11 12 13 14 15 PU external terminals communication 1st speed MI3 to MI6 1 2nd speed 205 J MI3toMI6 2 amp Zl 3rd speed ESS 3 4th 220 MI3 to MIG 4 Jog Freq Multi speed via External Terminals MI6 4 MI5 3 2 MI3 1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2 9 speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3 speed OFF OFF ON ON 4 speed OFF ON OFF OFF 5 speed OFF ON OFF ON 6 speed OFF ON ON OFF 7 speed OFF ON ON ON 8 speed ON OFF
188. h full scale 5V Pr 12 22 should be set to 5 10 100 50 If Pr 12 21 is set to 0 the output voltage will correspond to the max output frequency 12 23 AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 AVO2 1 ACO2 analog current 0 0 to 20 0mA 2 ACO2 analog current 4 0 to 20 0mA Besides parameter setting the voltage current mode should be used with the switch AVI3 4 AVO1 AVO2 ACI2 ACO2 12 24 AC2 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current 0 to 250 rated current a AO2 Analog Output Gain Unit 1 Settings 1 to 200 Factory Setting 100 84 Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the AO1 4 148 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 13 PG function Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters See Appendix B for details PG Input Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable PG 1 Single phase 2 Forward Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse Clockwise rotation Ea The relationship between the motor rotation and PG input is illustrated below A phase leads B phase Ane Aphase phase 13 00 2 phase leads A phase Aph REV gt CN phase B phase 13 00 3
189. habet b G E F G Hh li Jj LED gt a Lo D tt Display Buc a c D u English alphabet K L n Oo P q li S Tt U LED n Lu nnd a 11 11 Display L uo 1 D a English alphabet Y LED Display u E ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix B Accessories B 8 Extension Card For details please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http www gefran com Installation method b B 8 1 Relay Card EXP R2 ADV50 Relay Output Relay Output e ES ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 21 Appendix B Accessories B 8 2 Digital I O Card EXP D6 ADV50 0534 NOS MOF MT MS B 8 3 Analog I O Card EXP A4 ADV50 B 8 4 Communication Card EXP USB ADV50 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 22 Appendix Accessories J TTT 7 connect to extension card connect to PC E B 8 5 Speed Feedback Card EXP ENC ADV50 B 9 Fieldbus Modules B 9 1 DeviceNet Communication Module EXP DN ADV20 50 B 9 1 1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1 For RS 485 connection to ADV50 2 Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3 Address selector 4 Baud rate selector 5 Three LED status indicators for monitor Refer to the figure below
190. he AC drive with DC reactor please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal P of Braking unit Note2 Do NOT wire terminal N to the neutral point of power system ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 3 Appendix B Accessories B 1 1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors Dimensions are in millimeter inches Order P N RF 220 T 150R S8TOCQ RF 220 T 250R S8TOCP Cable length 300 11 81 al Model no a b 1 Max Weight g code RF 220 T 150R S8TOCQ 300 27 36 290 500 RF 220 T 250R 11 81 1 06 1 42 11 42 S8TOCP ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 4 RF 300 DT R Slot for screw M5 Appendix B Accessories Cable length 500 19 69 L Max weight Model no cod a b b1 c1 9 300 68R__ S8TOCS RF 300 100R S8TOCB 260 47 106 17 5 93 5 RF 300 DT 150R S8TOCT 1400 10 2 1 85 4 17 0 69 3 68 RF 300 DT 200R S8T1DB RF 300 DT 4008 S8TOCR RFP DT R Cables length 500 mm Section 4 mm Thermal protection cable lt cl a Max weight Modello n cod a b b1 c1
191. he output frequency range 01 01 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated the motor nameplate Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v f curve ratio For example if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7 66 V Hz 460V 60Hz 7 66V Hz This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Frequency Pr 01 03 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 0 Unit 0 1 Settings 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Ea This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid Point Voltage Pr 01 04 01 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 This parameter sets the Mid Point Frequency of the V f curve With this setting the V f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid Point frequency can be determined This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequ
192. ics mental T Control System Frequency Setting Resolution Output Frequency Resolution Torque Characteristics Overload Endurance Skip Frequency Accel Decel Time Stall Prevention Level DC Braking Regenerated Braking Torque Frequency Setting Pattern Keypad External Signal Operation Keypad Setting Signal External Signal Multi function Input Signal Multi function Output Indication Analog Output Signal Alarm Output Contact Operation Functions Protection Functions Display Keypad optional Built in Brake Chopper Built in EMI Filter Enclosure Rating Pollution Degree General Specifications V f or sensorless vector control with SPWM modulation Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation 0 01Hz 0 01Hz Including the auto torque auto slip compensation starting torque can be 150 at 3 0Hz 150 of rated current for 1 minute Three zones setting range 0 1 600Hz 0 1 to 600 seconds 2 Independent settings for Accel Decel time Setting 20 to 250 of rated current Operation frequency 0 1 600 0Hz output 0 100 rated current Start time 0 60 seconds stop time 0 60 seconds Approx 20 up to 125 possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit 2 2 11kW 3 15 hp models have brake chopper built in 4 point adjustable V f pattern Settingby A V Potentiometer 5kQ 0 5W 0 to 10VDC 4 to 20mA RS 485 interface Multi function Inputs 3 to 9 15 st
193. ies fixed storage unit When using these equipments the corresponding content will be read by bit byte or word Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 8 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1 You couldn t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON OFF via Soft PLC ADV50 The contacts contact a b can be used unlimitedly If there is no input signal the corresponding input relay could be empty and can t be used with other functions Equipment indication method X1 X7 X10 X11 The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point it is used to connect to external load It can be driven by input relay contact the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts It doesn t have the corresponding output relay if need it can be used as internal relay Equipment indication YO Y1 Y7 Y10 11 The symbol of equipment is Y and th
194. ights 9 2 2 9 O notused 1 used by PLC st aya ojo a 1 ACI AVI2 Al1 optional AI2 optional Display the Status of Multi function Input Terminal Settings Read Only Factory setting Display Status 4 84 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 MI2 Status Bit2 MI3 Status Bit3 MI4 Status Bit4 MI5 Status Bit5 MI6 Status Bit6 MI7 Status Bit7 MI8 Status Bit8 MI9 Status Bit9 MI10 Status Bit10 MI11 Status Bit11 MI12 Status Chapter 4 Parameters Ea The multi function input terminals are falling edge triggered For standard AC motor drive without extension card there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr 04 26 will display 63 111111 for no action Weights Bit For Example If Pr 04 26 displays 52 it means MI2 MI4 are active The display value 52 3241644 1 X 25 1X 2 1X 2 bit 6 X 2 bit 5 X 2 bit 3 X 2 Weights 22272222222 Bit o o r o s o o w 2 MI3 MIS MIG MI7 MI8 MI9 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 85 Chapter 4 Parameters When extension is installed the number of the multi function input terminals will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the multi function input terminals is shown as follows H9 40 9 8 7 2 0 O Active Weights 22 2 22 2 z 2 2 2 2 1 Off Bit iol ys 1 1 2 MI3
195. is 10 sec Pr 01 21 10 and the deceleration time from 60Hz to OHz is 40 seconds The delay time at 1 5Hz is 1 5 sec and the deceleration from 1 5Hz to OHz is 1 sec The rotation speed n 120 X 1 5 4 rpm min 1 5 2 rpm sec 0 75 rpm sec The revolution numbers 1 5 2X 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 revolutions t lt lt 25 1 5sec 1sec Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 1 5 X 2x r It also means that the motor will stop after running 1 5 circles Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 220 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 49 Chapter 4 Parameters Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 1 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 1 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Setti
196. ition For high inertia loads a brake resistor for dynamic braking may also be needed for fast decelerations 08 04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Operation stops coast to stop after momentary power loss 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency Ea This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 2 0 Ea If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting the AC motor drive will resume operation If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time the AC motor drive output is then turned off coast stop The selected operation after power loss in Pr 08 04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays Lu But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload even if the maximum allowable power loss time is lt 5 seconds the operation mode as set in Pr 08 04 is not executed In that case it starts up normally ETE Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency command 2 Speed search starts with minim
197. its Contact action After scanning act together Act immediately when count attains It has no relation with scan period After scanning act together Functions When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is On Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings 16 bit counters CO C7 1 Setting range of 16 bit counter is KO K32 767 KO is the same as K1 output contact will be On immediately at the first count 2 General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss If counter is latched it will ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss If using MOV command Soft PLC ADV50 to send a value which is large than setting to CO register at the next time that X1 is from Off to On CO counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings The setting of counter can use constant K or register D not includes special data register D1000 D1044 to be indirect setting If using constant K to be setting it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D it can be positive negative number The next number that counter counts up from 32 767 is 32 768 Example LD RST CO LD X1 CNT CO K5 LD co OUT YO 1 When X0 On RST command is executed reset to 0 and output contact r
198. k Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year If there is any leakage of liquid change of color cracks or Visual inspection deformation Measure static capacity when Static capacity gt initial value X 0 85 required Resi 6 8 stor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Y Year Year If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to Visual inspection smell O overheating Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring If there is any disconnection between B1 Resistor value should be within 10 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Transformer and reactor of main circuit Mag Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar smell Visual aural inspection and smell netic contactor and relay of main circuit Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half Year One Year If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection Tighten screw if necessary If the contact works correctly Visual inspection Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Cri
199. l Read R M Function Write W M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON R W M1027 Reserved M1028 Enable ON disable OFF high speed counter function R W M1029 Clear the value of high speed counter R W M1030 Decide to count up OFF count down ON R W M1031 Reserved C 4 9 Special Registers Special D Function Read R Write W 01000 Reserved 01001 firmware version R D1002 Program capacity R D1003 Checksum R PROS Reserved D1010 Present scan time Unit 0 1ms R 01011 scan time Unit 0 1ms R 01012 scan time Unit 0 1ms R D1013 D1019 Reserved 01020 Output frequency R D1021 Output current R The ID of the extension card 02 USB Card 03 12 Bit A D 2CH 12 Bit D A 2CH D1022 R 04 Relay Card 2C 05 Relay Card 3A 06 3IN 3OUT Card ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 27 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Special D Function Read R Write W 07 PG Card D1023 D1024 Reserved D1025 The present value of the high speed counter C235 low byte R D1026 The present value of the high speed counter C235 high byte R D1027 Frequency command of the PID control R D1028 The value of AVI analog voltage input 0 10V corresponds to 0 R 1023 The value of ACI analog current input 4 20mA corresponds to 0 D1029 1023 or the value of AVI2 analog voltage input 0 10V R corresponds to 0 1023 D1030 The val
200. l write the data 010 to the address H2001 of the ADV50 When M1 ON it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the ADV50 i e start the AC motor drive 4 When M2 ON it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the ADV50 i e stop the AC motor drive 5 When data is written successfully M1017 will be ON ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 61 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function M1000 s WPR D10 H2001 WPRP H2000 M2 WPRP H2000 M1017 MO M1 API Mnemonic Operands Function 141 FPID 1 82 S3 4 PID control for the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY KnM D FPID FPIDP 9 steps 1 S2 S3 4 Operands S1 PID Set Point Selection 0 4 S2 Proportional gain P 0 100 S3 Integral Time 0 10000 S4 Derivative control D 0 100 Explanation 1 This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly including Pr 10 00 PID set point selection Pr 10 02 Proportional gain P Pr 10 03 Integral time I and Pr 10 04 Derivative control D Program Example 1 Assume that when MO ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled 2 0 S3 1 unit 0 01 seconds and S4 1 unit 0 01 seconds 2 Assume that when M1 ON S1 is set to 0 PID function is disabled S271 unit 0 01 53 0 and S4 0 3 Assume tha
201. ll be executed and one of M1 and M2 will be On When X10 Off ZCP instruction will not be executed and MO M1 and M2 remain their status before XO Off iF ifC10 K10 On M1 If K10 lt C10 lt K100 M1 On M2 1 10 gt K100 2 On 3 To clear the comparison result use RST or ZRST instruction RST zat MO 2 Operands Function 12 MOV P 9 Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY D MOV MOVP 5 steps D a Wele lls Operands S Source of data D Destination of data Explanations 1 See the specifications of each model for their range of use 2 When this instruction is executed the content of S will be moved directly to When this instruction is not executed the content of D remains unchanged ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 49 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Program Example MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16 bit data 1 When Off the content D10 will remain unchanged If On the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register 2 When 1 Off the content D10 will remain unchanged If X1 On the present value TO will be moved to D10 data register
202. ll disable automatic reset restart operation after fault has occurred When enabled the AC motor drive will restart with speed search which starts at the frequency before the fault To set the waiting time before restart after a fault please set Pr 08 07 Base Block Time for Speed Search EXE Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 6000 sec Factory Setting 60 0 4 108 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr 08 15 For example If Pr 08 15 is set to 10 and Pr 08 16 is set to 600s 10 min and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10 08 17 Automatic Energy saving Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Energy saving operation disabled 1 Energy saving operation enabled Output Voltage 100 70 During auto energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load The output voltage is maximally lowered to 70 of the normal output voltage Output Frequency Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR Factory Setting 0 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop Settings The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V 200VAC 50Hz 60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive
203. ltage current 0 8 33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10 60Hz 4 70 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq 60Hz ne EE Potentiometer 1 Pr 04 00 16 7 Bias adjustment 40 2 7 i 04 01 0 Positive bias Pr 04 02 100 Input gain Pr 04 03 0 No negative bias command Bias s Gain 100 2 OHz OV 5V 10V Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 16 7 Example 3 Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired In addition to signals of 0 to 10V the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V or any value under 10V Regarding the setting please refer to the following examples Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr 04 00 20 0 Bias adjustment fo E Pr 04 01 0 Positive bias TD a 04 02 83 3 Input gain DE 04 03 0 No negative bias command BOA Bias 10 2 Adjustment F Gain 10V 10V 2V 100 83 3 2V 70v 5V 10 Bias adjustment 10Hz 60Hz Gain 100 100 20 0 XV Example 4 Use of 0 5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts Instead of adjusting gain as example below you can set Pr 01 00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results Gain adjustment Pr 01 00 60Hz Max output Freq Potentiometer Pr
204. minals Shielded leads amp Cable 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Figure 4 for models of ADV50 Series ADV50 2022 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 2037 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3055E XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3075 XBX 2T 4F ADV50 3110 XBX 4F en braking resistor TBR I optional I BUE L braking unit optional BR Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker Q O Pa Motor R L OR L1 u T1 S L2 O S L2 T L3 Q Q T L3 QOEQG AA SA i RAE Recommended Circuit e RB when power supply MC BA Multi function contact output 15 turned OFF bya 0 RC 240Vac 2 5A Max fault output RB 120Vac 5A Max MG 28Vdc 5 A Factory setting is malfunction indication Factory setting MIT Factory setting NPN Mode MI2 Drive is in operation Me Factory MIS E 4 48V50mA Max w i Ei 18 setting E MI4 Multi function PNP i Photocoulper Output Please refer to Figure 7 Multi step 3 56 6 MI5 MEM for wiring of NPN Multi step 4 mode and PNP Doc MI6 om Output mode DCM factory setting Analog freq EG lcurrent meter 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency m OOV 3 i Power supply RS 485 serial interface Factory setting 10V 20mA ACI gs 5KQ 2 lt O AVI 1 Reserv
205. minute Operation time seconds 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 50Hz or more 2s710Hz Load 250 factor ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Present Fault Record Second Most Recent Fault Record Third Most Recent Fault Record Fourth Most Recent Fault Record PAM Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting 0 Readings 0 No fault 1 Over current oc 2 Over voltage ov 3 IGBT Overheat 1 4 Power Board Overheat 2 5 Overload oL 6 Overload oL1 7 Motor Overload oL2 8 External Fault EF 9 Hardware protection failure HPF 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel ocA 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 13 Reserved 14 Phase loss PHL 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel decel failure CFA 17 Software password protection codE 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure cF1 0 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure cF2 0 20 CC OC Hardware protection failure HPF1 21 OV Hardware protection failure HPF2 22 GFF Hardware protection failure HPF3 23 OC Hardware protection failure HPF 4 24 U phase error cF3 0 25 V phase error cF3 1 26 W phase error cF3 2 27 DCBUS error cF3 3 28 IGBT Overheat cF3 4 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 95 Chapter 4 Parameters 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 39 40 Power Board Overheat cF3 5 Control Board CP
206. motor drive receives the messages without a communication error but cannot handle them An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive The xx of is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below In the exception response the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1 and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H ASCII mode RTU mode STX Address 01H Address Low 0 Function 86H Address High 4 Exception code 02H Function Low 8 CRC CHK Low C3H Function High 6 CRC CHK High A1H m Exception code 2 LRC CHK Low T LRC CHK High Y END 1 CR END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes Exception code Explanation Illegal function code 01 The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data address 02 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive Illegal data value 03 The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CT L V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Exception code Explanation 04 Slave device failure
207. mple position Refer to Pr 01 25 for details 26 OOB Out of Balance Detection The OOB Out Of Balance Detection function can be used with PLC for washing machine When this setting is enabled it will get value from the settings of Pr 08 21 and Pr 08 22 PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t value Pr 08 23 27 Motor selection bit 0 28 Motor selection bit 1 When this setting is enabled it can be used for motor selection Pr 01 01 01 06 01 26 01 43 07 18 07 38 07 00 07 06 For example 27 MI2 28 When MI1 and MI2 are OFF it selects motor 0 When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF it selects motor 1 When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON it selects motor 2 When MI1 and MI2 are ON it selects motor 3 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 79 Chapter 4 Parameters Accel Decel Time Selection Frequency Master Acceleration Freq Delceleration 4 Decel time 1 01 10 Accel time 2 01 11 Decel time 2 Accel time 1 01 12 01 09 Time RUN STOP PU External terminal communication OFF Accel Decel time 1 amp 2 Multi function Input Terminals Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 MI3 to MI6 Accel Decel Time and Multi function Input Terminals Multi Step Speed 05 07 Frequency 05 06 05 08 05 05 3 1 05 09 0504 i rot 0 0 105 10 0503 3 tom UL et wd ca
208. n or from left to right 6 MPS MRD MPP commands Divergent memory of multi output It can produce many various outputs The command MPS is the start of divergent point The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line Basically each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol T MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack Because it is the last item of the horizontal line it means the status of this horizontal line is ending ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 13 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function MPS C You can recognize this command by the symbol 1 C b Basically that is all right to use the above MRD method to analyze but sometimes compiler will ar MPP P omit the same outputs as shown at the righ
209. nal state 5 8 Stop remote node 9 10 11 Reset node 12 13 14 Reset communication 15 Enter reset application state automatically 16 Enter reset communication state automatically lt Reset Application 9 4 10 11 16 m Reset Communication pO 2 14 Pre Operation ABCD 104 5 7 13 13 Stopped AB 6 8 12 Operation ABCD 1 After power is applied it is auto in initialization state B Node Guard C SDO D Emergency E PDO F Boot up ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 5 Appendix D CANopen Function Initializing Pre Operational Operational Stopped PDO 00 SYNC Time Stamp o o EMERG o o Boot up o NMT o o o NMT Protocol is shown as follows NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave s Request byteO byte 1 Indication s t CS Node ID I Indication reques COB ID 0 Indication Indication Cs Value Definition 1 Start 2 Stop 128 Enter Pre Operational 129 Reset Node 130 Reset Communication D 1 4 2 SDO Service Data Object SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client Server model One SDO has two COB ID request SDO and response SDO to upload or download data between two nodes No data limit for SDOs to transfer data But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes
210. nals Control word is a 16 byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition The status bits are bit 4 to bit 6 as shown in the following Bit 4 ramp function enabled Bit 5 ramp function disabled Bit 6 rfg use reference ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 13 Appendix D CANopen Function Following is the flow chart for status switch Power Fault Disable Start Fault Reaction Active X0XX1111 Not Ready to Switch On X0XX0000 X0XX1000 XXXXXXXX Switch On Disable c 0XXXXX0X X1XX0000 4 0XXXXX0X 0XXXX110 ae QStop 1 OXXXX01X QStop 0 OXXXX01X Ready to Switch On or OXXXXX0X X01X0001 QStop 0 oxn Joooxit0 Power Switch On Enable X01X0011 OXXXXXOX or oxxxorto jede Font 0 QStop 0 Operation Enable Quick Stop Active X01X0111 X00X0111 0XXX1111 QStop 1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 GEFRAN BENELUX Lammerdries 14 B 2250 OLEN Ph 32 0 14248181 Fax 32 0 14248180 info gefran be GEFRAN BRASIL ELETROELETR NICA Avenida Dr Altino Arantes 377 378 Vila Clementino 04042 032 SAO PAULO SP Ph 55 0 1155851133 Fax 455 0 1155851425 gefran gefran com br GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND Philipp Reis StraBe 63500 SELIGENSTADT Ph 49 0 61828090 49 0 6182809222 vertrieb gefran de GEFRAN S p A Via Sebina 74 25050 Provaglio d Iseo BS ITALY Ph
211. nce R1 Motor 2 0 65535 mQ 07 30 Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 07 31 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 2to 10 07 32 Motor Rated Current Motor 3 30 FLA to 120 FLA FLA 07 33 Motor No Load Current Motor 3 O FLA to 99 FLA 0 4 FLA 407 34 Torque Compensation Motor 3 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 A 07 35 Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 3 0 00 to 10 00 0 00 07 36 Motor Line to line Resistance R1 Motor 3 0 65535 mQ 07 37 Motor Rated Slip Motor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Hz 3 00 07 38 Motor Pole Number Motor 3 2to 10 Group 8 Special Parameters Factory Setting Customer DC Brake Current Parameter 08 00 08 02 DC Braking Time 9 9 to 60 0 sec during Stopping DC Braking Time 08 03 StartPointforDC to Goo ori l Braking 08 04 Momentary Power 0 Operation stops after momentary power Loss Operation loss ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 21 pan 4 Parameters Factory Parameter b add eee Setting Selection 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss speed search starts with the minimum frequency 08 05 Maximum Allowable 9 4 to 5 0 sec 2 0 Power Loss Time 0 Disable speed search Base block Spee
212. ncl Rated voltage 2M 230Vac 1ph 2T 230Vac 3ph 4 400 Vac 3ph Software X standard Braking unit X 7 not included B included Keypad X not included K included ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 3 Series Number Explanation 000 6025 OT 8 01 1230 Production number Production week Production year 2008 Production factory T Taiwan W China Model 230V 3 phase 1HP 0 75kW If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems please contact your distributor 1 1 4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0 5 2HP 0 4 1 5kW Frame A Input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Case body Keypad cover Control board case Control board cover Output terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 15HP 0 75 11kW Frame B amp C Input terminals cover R L1 S L2 T L3 Keypad cover Case body Control board cover Output terminals cover U T1 V T2 W T3 Internal Structure READY power indicator RUN status indicator FAULT fault indicator 1 Switch to ON for 50Hz refer to P 01 00 to P 01 02 for details 2 Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P 02 02 3 Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI P 02 02 2 Keypad mounting port ACI terminal ACI AVI 2 switch NPN PNP Mounting port for extension card RS
213. nd source Pr 02 01 is changed 3 Enable Operation status will change if operation command source Pr 02 01 is changed 0 Decelerate to 0 Hz Loss of ACI Signal 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 1 4 20mA 2 Continue operation by last frequency command 0 by UP DOWN Key 1 Based on accel decel time 02 07 Up Down Mode 2 Constant speed Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit Pr 02 08 Accel Decel Rate of Change of 02 08 UP DOWN 0 01 10 00 Hz 0 01 Operation with Constant Speed 0 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys or Multi function Inputs UP DOWN Last used frequency saved Source of Second 1 0 to 10V from AVI 02 09 Frequency 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to 10V from Command AVI2 3 RS 485 RJ 45 USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication mo 0 First Master Frequency Command Combinatii 1 First Master Frequency 02 10 First and Second Second Master Frequency Command Master Frequency q y Command 2 First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 02 11 Keypad Frequency 0 00 to 600 0Hz 60 00 Command Communication 0 00 to 600 0Hz 02 12 Frequency 60 00 Command 4 8 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 0 Save Keypad amp Communication The Selections for Frequency Saving Keypad or 02 13 Communication 1 Save Keypad Frequency only Frequency Command 2 Save Communication Frequency only Initial Frequency 0 by Current Freq Comm
214. nds of the MC should have an R C surge absorber W Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration W Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A W When using a general GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter select a current sensor with sensitivity of 2 00mA or above and not less than 0 1 second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above W Do NOT run stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON OFF Run stop AC motor drives by RUN STOP command via control terminals or keypad If you still need to run stop AC drives hour by turning power ON OFF it is recommended to do so only ONCE per W Do NOT connect 3 phase models to a 1 phase power source 2 12 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Output terminals for main circuit U V W W The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running The methods to control the operation direction are method 1 set by the communication parameters Please refer to the group 9 for details Method2 control by the optional keypad KB ADV50 Refer to Appendix B for details W When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 on the AC motor drive Please use inductance filter Do not use
215. ng lt 90 no condensation allowed 86 106 kPa lt 1000m lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max Chapter 1 Introduction Temperature 20 C 60 C 4 F 140 F Storage Relative Humidity lt 90 no condensation allowed Transportation Atmosphere pressure 86 106 kPa lt 20Hz 9 80 m s 1G max 20 50Hz 5 88 m s 0 6G max 2 good for a factory type environment Vibration Pollution Degree Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Option 1 10 to 50 C Option 2 10 to 40 C Air flow Air Flow Frame B and C Mounting Clearances Option 1 10 to 50 C Option 2 10 to 40 C Air flow 1 8 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Operating storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws Other directions are not allowed The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation The heat sink temperature may rise to 90 C when running The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high
216. ng lt Multi step2 ___ o 6 4 Multi step 3 55 MI5 Multi step 4 ss MIG Digital Signal Common DCM EO Don t apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals O4 10V m Os Operate from 3 i Powersupply external signal Factory setting 10V 3mA ACI Mode 5KQ 2 AVI Master Frequency sve 1 0to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI AVI switch 4 20mA 0 10V When switching to AVI ACM itindicates AVI2 Analog Signal Common Figure 3 1 External terminals input MI3 DCM Set Pr 04 05 10 MI1 DCM MI4 DCM Set Pr 04 06 11 MI2 DCM Operate from the EN optional keypad A V KB ADV50 RUN 3 3 Trial Run The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal 02 01 2 1 Both MI1 DCM and MI2 DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD STOP and REV STOP 2 Please connect a potentiometer among AVI 10V and DCM or apply power 0 10Vdc to AVI DCM as shown in figure 3 1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 3 3 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up 3 Setting the potentiometer or AVI DCM 0 10Vdc power to less than 1V 4 Setting for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running you should set MI2 On And if you want to decelerate to stop please set MI1 MI2 Off 5 Check following items Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration Check if accelera
217. ngs 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 2 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Unit 0 1 Factory Setting 220 0 Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 2 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Unit 0 1 Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 2 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Minimum Output Voltage Vmin Motor 2 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 10 0 Factory Setting 20 0 Maximum Voltage Frequency Fbase Motor 3 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 60 00 Maximum Output Voltage Vmax Motor 3 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Unit 0 1 Factory Setting 220 0 Factory Setting 440 0 Mid Point Frequency Fmid Motor 3 Unit 0 01 4 50 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 10 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 1 50 Mid Point Voltage Vmid Motor 3 Unit 0 1 Settings 115V 230V series 0 1 to 255 0V Factory Setting 10 0 460V series 0 1 to 510 0V Factory Setting 20 0 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Motor 3 Unit 0
218. nput output Contacts The function of input contact X input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program The On Off of input contact X can be changed with the On Off of input equipment but can t be changed by using peripheral equipment Soft PLC ADV50 W The Function of Output Contact Y The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On Off signal There are two kinds of output contact one is relay and the other is transistor It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program Otherwise the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 20 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function The output of YO will be decided by circuit D 2 i e decided by On Off of X10 LL N YO is repeated X10 ed 4 3 Value Constant Decimal 32 768 K32 767 16 bit operation Constant Hexadecimal H0000 HFFFF 16 bit operation There are five value types for ADV50 PLC to use by the different control destination The following is the explanation of value types 1 Binary Number BIN It uses binary system for the PLC inte
219. o these components do not touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands 3 Only qualified persons are allowed to install wire and maintain AC motor drives 1 Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power 2 DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature direct sunlight high humidity excessive vibration corrosive gases or liquids or airborne dust or metallic particles 3 Only use AC motor drives within specification Failure to comply may result in fire explosion or electric shock 4 To prevent personal injury please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment 5 When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor Refer to appendix B Reactor for details 6 Therated voltage for AC motor drive must be x 240V x 480V for 460V models and the mains supply current capacity must be lt 5000A RMS DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus International CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CiA Other trademarks belong to their respective owners Table of Contents
220. oad The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current NOTE The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150 of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip Overload 2 Motor overload CC current clamp OV hardware error GFF hardware error OC hardware error UE E I hh External Base Block Refer to Pr 08 07 6 2 Corrective Actions Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins Check the fan and clean it Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation See chapter 1 Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range Check for abnormal load in motor Check for correct wiring of input power to R S T for 3 phase models without phase loss Check whether the motor is overloaded Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr 07 02 Use the next higher power AC motor drive model Check for possible motor overload Check electronic thermal overload setting Use a higher power motor Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr 07 00 Reduce the motor load Adjust the over torque detection setting to an appropriate setting Pr 06 03 to Pr 06 0
221. od 2 After rebooting password function will be recovered 4 40 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Password Decode Flow Chart 00 09 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr 00 08 Correct Password END 00 09 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr 00 08 Chapter 4 Parameters Incorrect Password END 3 chances to enter the correct password 1st time displays 1 if password is incorrect 2nd time displays 2 if password is incorrect 3rd time displays code blinking If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries the keypad will be locked Turn the power OFF ON to re enter the password EXE Control Method Settings 0 V f Control 1 Vector Control Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive 00 11 Reserved Ea 00 12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection Settings 0 230V 400V 220V 380V Factory Setting 0 Ea This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 41 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 1 Basic Parameters Maximum Output Frequency Fmax Unit 0 01 Settings 50 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 60 00 This parameter determines the AC motor drive s Maximum Output Frequency All the motor drive frequency command sources analog inputs 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA are scaled to correspond to t
222. of the Multi function Input Terminals MI7 MI12 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to increment the AC 12 Counter Trigger drive s internal counter When input is received the counter is incremented by 1 When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable 13 Counter Reset counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input 14 External Fault Terminals MI7 2 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to be External Fault E F inputs j PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON the PID function will be disabled disabled AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled If the status of terminal is changed AC motor drive will restart from OHZ E Parameter lock When this setting is enabled all parameters will be locked and enable ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 write parameters is disabled 4 141 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Operation ON Operation command via Ext Terminals Command OFF Operation command via 02 01 setting 18 Selection Pr 02 01 setting external Pr 02 01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set See the explanation below this table terminals Operation ON Operation command via Digital Keypad Command OFF Operation command via Pr 02 01 setting 19 Selection Pr 02 01 setting Digital Pr 02 01 is disable
223. on HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF Desired Frequency 9 Active when the desired frequency Pr 03 02 is attained Attained 4 138 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Terminal Count Value 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall 12 bn 9 Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating supervision Over Current Stall 13 En Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn Heat Sink Overheat 14 off the drive When it is higher than 850C 185 it will be Warning ON 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID function is operating 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV 49 Zero Speed Output Active unless there is an output frequency present at Signal terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Communication Warning 20 FbE Cexx AoL2 AUE Active when there is a Communication Warning SAVE Brake Control Desired Active when output frequency gt 03 14 Deactivated when Frequency Attained output frequency lt Pr 03 15 after STOP command 22 Drive ready Active when the d
224. on command is cancelled ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 57 Chapter 4 Parameters MI1 DCM close ON OFF output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or 2 This action will follow MI1 DCM Change operation or MI2 DCM status autos Pr 02 01 1 or 2 ON is close OFF is open output meueny Pr 02 05 1 or 3 When the operation command source isn t from the external terminals independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr 02 05 if the two conditions below are both met 1 When operation command source is changed to external terminal Pr 02 01 1 or 2 2 status of terminal and AC motor drive is different And the operation of the AC motor drive will be 1 When setting 0 or 1 the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status 2 When setting 2 or 3 the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status MI1 DCM close ON OFF ON power is applied OFF ON output frequency Pr 02 05 0 or 1 Kit will run i output frequency Pr 02 05 2 or 3 it won t run when power is applied It needs to received a run command after previous command is cancelled A The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this condition It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch 4 58 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameter
225. on dampers is the last choice Vibrations must be within the specification Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive 2 Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short circuits If necessary install the AC motor drive in a dust proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations use a completely sealed enclosure 3 ambient temperature should be within the specification Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability For semiconductor components damage will occur once any specification is out of range Therefore it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary In addition the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures making cabinet heating necessary 4 Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 90 and non condensing environment Use an air conditioner and or exsiccator ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 9 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons Some solutions are W High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by 1 Separate the power system use a tran
226. ons please contact your dealer PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made 2 Acharge may still remain in the DC link capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off To prevent personal injury please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Never reassemble internal components or wiring The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input output terminals Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply 5 Ground the ADV50 using the ground terminal The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram 6 ADV50 series is used only to control variable speed of 3 phase induction motors NOT for 1 phase motors or other purpose 7 ADV50 series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation DO NOT use Hi pot test for internal components The semi conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high voltage 2 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards These components are especially sensitive to static electricity To prevent damage t
227. operation for easy tuning M Derivative Control D Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 1 00 sec Factory Setting 0 00 Ea This parameter specifies derivative control rate of change of the input and associated gain D With this parameter set to 1 the PID output is equal to differential time x present deviation previous deviation It increases the response speed but it may cause over compensation Pria The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning E Upper Bound for Integral Control Unit 1 Settings 0 to 100 Factory Setting 100 Ea This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain I and therefore limits the Master Frequency Ea The formula is Integral upper bound Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 x Pr 10 05 This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 133 Chapter 4 Parameters ED Primary Delay Filter Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 2 5 sec Factory Setting 0 0 To avoid amplification of measurement noise the controller output derivative digital filter is inserted This filter helps to dampen oscillations The complete PID diagram is in the following Integral dain puput Digital Setpoint l mit Limit filter 10 07 10 06 feedback 10 01 10 07 PID Output Frequency Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 110 Factory Setting 100 Thi
228. opped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed Accel Decel Time Used to select the one of 2 Accel Decel Times Pr 01 09 to Pr 01 12 See explanation at the end of this table 7 Selection Command Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi function Input Terminals MI7 2 Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 for Jog control Jog Operation 8 i i Control NOTE Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 4 140 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description External Base Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor 9 Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run When Refer to Pr 08 06 base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency 18 UP Increase Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency 41 DOWN Decrease increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02 07 02 08 This Master Frequency function is also called motor potentiometer Parameter value 12 programs one
229. ory Setting 0 0 E This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque Only to be used for V f control mode Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor A Slip Compensation Used without PG Motor 0 Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 10 00 Factory Setting 0 00 E While driving an asynchronous motor increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an increase in slip and decrease in speed This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no load current Pr 07 01 the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter 0704 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 97 Chapter 4 Parameters 1 Auto Tuning R1 motor doesn t run 2 Auto Tuning R1 No load Test with running motor Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2 When set to 1 it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr 07 01 must be input manually When set to 2 the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr 07 01 and Pr 07 05 will be set automatically The steps for AUTO Tuning are 1 Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct 2 Make sure the motor has no load before executing
230. otor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed Minimum Output Frequency Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B 5 SR during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi function Indication input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected gt Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal MET Active when a fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indication HPF ocA ocd ocn GFF Desired Frequency 1 9 Active when the desired frequency Pr 03 02 is attained Attained Terminal Count Value 10 Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value 11 Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall 2 12 x Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating supervision 4 62 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings Function Description Over Current Stall 13 ba Active when the Over Current Stall function operating supervision Heat Sink Overheat When heatsink overheats it will signal to prevent OH turn off Warning the drive When it is higher than 85 C 185 F it will be ON 15
231. oup 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 User Parameters Basic Parameters Operation Method Parameters Output Function Parameters Input Function Parameters Multi Step Speed Parameters Protection Parameters Motor Parameters Special Parameters Communication Parameters PID Control Parameters Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Analog Input Output Parameters for Extension Card PG function Parameters for Extension Card ADV50 SW PW V1 10 CTL V2 10 4 1 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 1 Summary of Parameter Settings The parameter can be set during operation Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Setting Customer 00 00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive Read only THE 00 01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Read only Tg 00 02 Parameter Reset 0 Parameter can be read written 1 All parameters are read only 6 Clear PLC program 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings 50Hz 230V 400V or 220V 380V depends on Pr 00 12 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings 60Hz 220V 440V 400 03 Start up Display Selection 0 Display the frequency command value Fxxx 1 Display the actual output frequency Hxxx 2 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 3 Multifunction display see Pr 00 04 4 FWD REV command 5 PLCx PLC selections PLCO PLC1 PLC2 400 04 Content of M
232. ow DC Braking Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved ALE Braking Time during Start up Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Braking current after RUN command When the time has elapsed the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency Pr 01 05 ETE DC Braking Time during Stopping Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Braking current during stopping If stopping with DC Braking is desired Pr 02 02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop ETE Start Point for DC Braking Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 This parameter determines the frequency when DC Braking will begin during deceleration Output Frequency Start Point for DC Braking DC Braking Time Time during during Stopping 01 05 Stopping 03 gt Minimum Output Frequency Run Stop ON OFF DC Braking Time DC Braking during Start up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts such as fans and pumps Under such circumstances DC Braking can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion 4 104 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea DC Braking during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in pos
233. p module 256 the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2 s complement negation of the sum For example reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H STX Address 1 0 Address 0 q Function 1 0 Function 0 Ky ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 0 4 Starting data address v 4 0 0 Number of data 0 m LRC Check 1 F LRC Check 0 6 END 1 CR END 0 LF 01H 03H 04H 01H 00H 01H 0AH the 2 s complement negation of OAH is F6H RTU mode Address 01H Function 03H Starting data address 21H 02H Number of data 00H count by word 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check is calculated by the following steps Step 1 Load a 16 bit register called CRC register with FFFFH Step 2 Exclusive OR the first 8 bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16 bit CRC register putting the result in the CRC register Step 3 Examine the LSB of CRC register Step 4 If the LSB of CRC register is 0 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling then repeat step 3 If the LSB of CRC register is 1 shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H then repeat step 3 Step 5 Repea
234. places with humidity and dust it s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Receiving and Inspection This ADV50 AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment After receiving the AC motor drive please check for the following W Check to make sure that the package includes AC motor drive the Quick Start manual and CD E Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment W Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order 1 1 1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP 0 75kW 3 phase 230V AC motor drive AC Drive Model Input Spec Output Spec Output Frequency Range Serial Number amp Code Power Board Software Version Control Board 1 1 2 Model Explanation MODEL ADV50 1007 XXX 2T INPUT 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz 5 1A OUTPUT 3PH 0 240V 4 2A 1 6kVA 0 75kW 1HP FREQUENCY RANGE 0 1 400Hz Di 00096 801120 02 03 ADV50 1007 2T Drive ADV50 series Mechanical drive sizes 1 size 1 frame A 2 size 2 frame 3 size 3 frame Drive powers in kW 004 0 4 kW 007 0 75 kW 015 1 5 kW 022 2 2 kW 037 3 7 kW 055 2 5 5 kW 075 2 7 5 kW 110 11 0 kW EMI Filter F included not i
235. protocol lt 8 0 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 N 1 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 E 2 gt Modbus RTU mode protocol lt 8 0 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 N 1 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 E 2 gt Modbus ASCII mode protocol lt 7 0 2 gt 09 10 A Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Settings 0 1 2 3 Factory Setting 0 Warn and keep operating Warn and RAMP to stop Warn and COAST to stop No warning and keep operating Ea This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors occurs A Time out Detection for USB Card Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 120 0 sec Factory Setting 0 0 0 0 Disable 09 12 COM port for PLC Communication Settings 0 1 Factory Setting 0 RS485 USB card ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 131 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 10 PID Control 10 00 PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 10VDC 3 ACI 4 20 AVI2 0 10VDC 4 PID set point Pr 10 11 10 01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0 10VDC 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI 4 20mA AVI2 0 10VDC Ea Note that the
236. put current is lower than the setting specified in Pr 06 02 the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set frequency command value 4 92 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Over Current Stall Prevention during Over Current Operation output Detection frequency decrease Level 06 02 Output Current Output N Frequency over current stall prevention during operation ETE Over Torque Detection Mode OL2 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Over Torque detection disabled 1 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 2 Over Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation After over torque is detected stop running 3 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected keep running until OL1 or OL occurs 4 Over Torque detection enabled during acceleration After over torque is detected stop running Ea This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over torque OL2 is detected via the following method if the output current exceeds the over torque detection level Pr 06 04 longer than the setting of Pr 06 05 Over Torque Detection Time the warning message OL2 is displayed If a Multi functional Output Terminal is set to over torque detection Pr 03 00 03 01 04 the output is on Please refer to Pr 03 00 03 01 for details JE w Ove
237. puts NPN current 16mA NPN Mode PNP Mode DCM 94 71 1 1 multi input Multi Input 2 terminal Terminal 1 1 v ese errr iY pepeg 1 A 1 Pi A 4 i 1 1 i bos ve 24V DCM Internal Circuit i Internal Circuit The position of the control terminals MI2 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 15 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal symbols and functions Terminal Symbol MI1 MI2 MI3 MIA MIS MI6 24V DCM RB RC MO1 MCM 10V 2 16 Terminal Function Forward Stop command Reverse Stop command Multi function Input 3 Multi function Input 4 Multi function Input 5 Multi function Input 6 DC Voltage Source Digital Signal Common Multi function Relay output N O a Multi function Relay output N C b Multi function Relay common Multi function Output 1 Photocoupler Multi function output common Potentiometer power supply Factory Settings NPN mode ON Connect to ON Run in direction OFF Stop acc to Stop Method ON Run in MI2 direction OFF Stop acc to Stop Method Refer to Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for programming the Multi function Inputs ON the activation current is 5 5mA OFF leakage current tolerance is 10HA 24VDC 20mA used for PNP mode Common for digi
238. quency Frequency A Wits tee ees The limit of decel time Z 4 frequency calculated by PID output frequency 10 15 The limit of 01 05 dir accel time gt lt Time 10 14 Fmin lower bound of frequency FSleep 1 C i i i lowerbound i Fomd 0 Fmin lt Fsleep lt of frequency Fout 0 i 1 When output frequency lt sleep frequency and time gt detection time it will go sleep mode When min output frequency PID frequency S lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency lt sleep frequency and time gt detection time frequency will be 0 in sleep mode If sleep function is disabled frequency command lower bound frequency When PID frequency lt min output frequency and sleep function is enabled output frequency lt sleep frequency and time gt detection time output frequency 0 in sleep mode If output frequency lt sleep frequency but time lt detection time frequency command lower frequency If sleep function is disabled output frequency 0 Eu Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting 0 4 136 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency Pr 01 05 Ea This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when con
239. r Torque Detection Level OL2 Unit 1 Settings 10 to 200 Factory Setting 150 Ea This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive Over Torque Detection Time OL2 Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 60 0 sec Factory Setting 0 1 Ea This parameter sets the time for how long over torque must be detected before OL2 is displayed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 93 Chapter 4 Parameters ETE Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection OL1 Settings 0 Factory Setting 2 Operate with a Standard Motor self cooled by fan 1 Operate with a Special Motor forced external cooling 2 Operation disabled Ea This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating 100 00 A o o o N ES o rated current of the motor o 25 50 75 100 125 rated frequency of the motor Standard motor self cooled by fan 150 rated current of the motor N o 25 50 75 100 125 rated frequency of the motor Special Motor forced external cooling 150 06 07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Unit 1 Settings 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting 60 4 94 The parameter determines the time required for activating the I t electronic thermal protection function The graph below shows 14 curves for 150 output power for 1
240. ram Example When XO goes from Off to On the content in DO minuses 1 automatically Li esee ws API Mnemonic Operands Function 30 ROR P D n Rotate to the Right Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps op X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR 5 steps D a n Operands ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function D Device to be rotated Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations 1 This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits 2 This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions Program Example When goes from Off to On the 16 bits 4 bits as a group in D10 will rotate to the right as shown in the figure below The bit marked with gt will be sent to carry flag M1022 Rotate to the right gt upper bit lower bit D10 da 16 bits uM After one rotation to the right u upper bit lower bit M1022 D10 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 90 t flag API Mnemonic Operands Function 31 ROL Rotate to the Left Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY KnM T C D ROL ROLP 5 steps D E a Wele le n Operands
241. ramming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped Refer to parameter Pr 01 13 Pr 01 15 Parameter value 09 programs a Multi function Input Terminals for external Base Block control External Base NOTE When a Base Block signal is received the AC motor 9 Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run When Refer to Pr 08 06 base block control is deactivated the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed and then accelerate to Master Frequency i0 UP Increase Increase decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active When both inputs are active at the same time the Master Frequency 11 DOWN Decrease increase decrease is halted Please refer to Pr 02 07 02 08 This Master Frequency function is also called motor potentiometer Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi function Input 7 Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to increment the AC 12 Counter Trigger A drive s internal counter When an input is received the counter is incremented by 1 When active the counter is reset and inhibited To enable 13 Counter Reset counting the input should be OFF Refer to Pr 03 05 and 03 06 Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi function Input 14 External Fault Terminals MI3 MI6 Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to be External Fault E F inputs ADV50 SW PW V1 11
242. re Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories cUL listed and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code NEC and the Canadian Electrical Code CEC Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in Wiring Notes as a minimum standard Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data The Line Fuse Specification in Appendix B lists the recommended fuse part number for each ADV50 Series part number These fuses or equivalent must be used on all installations where compliance with U L standards is a required 1 Make sure that power is only applied to the R L1 S L2 T L3 terminals Failure to comply result in damage to the equipment The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration Check following items after finishing the wiring A Are all connections correct B No loose wires C No short circuits between terminals or to ground ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 2 1 Chapter 2 Installation and
243. requency for a long time the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower To prevent overheating it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive s corresponding control terminals ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 99 Chapter 4 Parameters When the source of first second frequency command is set to AVI 02 00 1 02 09 1 it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection i e Pr 07 12 cannot be set to 1 DLF LH If temperature exceeds the setting level motor will be coast to stop LL is displayed When the temperature decreases below the level of Pr 07 15 Pr 07 16 and Ours stops blinking you can press RESET key to clear the fault 07 14 overheat protection level must exceed Pr 07 15 overheat warning level Ea The PTC uses the AVI input and is connected via resistor divider as shown below 1 The voltage between 10V to ACM lies within 10 4V 11 2V 2 The impedance for AVI is around 47kQ 3 Recommended value for resistor divider R1 is 1 20kQ 4 Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC ADV50 Resistor divider R1 PTC internal circuit 4 100 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level Protection level 07 14 Vito Rpr
244. rive is on and no abnormality detected Desired frequency 2 23 Active when the desired frequency 2 Pr 03 14 is attained attained Multi function Input Terminal MI7 Multi function Input Terminal MI8 Multi function Input Terminal MI9 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 139 Chapter 4 Parameters Multi function Input Terminal M110 Multi function Input Terminal 1 Multi function Input Terminal MI12 Settings 0 to 28 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they 0 No Function have no effect on operation Multi Step Speed Command 1 These four inputs select the multi speed defined by Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 as shown in the diagram at the end of the table in Multi Step Speed 2 Pr 04 08 Command 2 NOTE Pr 05 00 to Pr 05 14 can also be used to control output Multi Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive s internal PLC Command 3 function There are 17 step speed frequencies including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency to select for Multi Step Speed icati 4 Psp application Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad After faults such as O H O C and O V are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive When the command is active acceleration and deceleration is 6 Accel Decel Inhibit st
245. rnal operation or storage The relative information of binary system is in the following Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system the status are 1 or 0 Nibble Itis made up of continuous 4 bits such as b3 b0 It can be used to represent number 0 9 of decimal or 0 of hexadecimal Byte made up of continuous 2 nibbles i e 8 bits 67 50 It can used to represent 00 FF of hexadecimal system Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes i e 16 bits b15 b0 It can used to represent 0000 FFFF of hexadecimal system Double It is made up of continuous 2 words i e 32 bits 631 50 It can used to Word represent 00000000 FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system The relations among bit nibble byte word and double word of binary number are shown as follows DW lt Double Word W1 Wo lt Word 2 BY1 BYO Byte pu gg NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NBO Nibble ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 21 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function 2 Octal Number OCT The numbers of external input and output terminal of ADV50 PLC use octal number Example External input XO X7 X10 X17 device number External output YO Y7 Y10 Y17 device number 3 Decimal Number DEC The suitable time for decimal number to use in ADV50 PLC system W To be the setting value of timer T or counter C such as TMR CO K50 K constant W To be the device number of M T C and D For example M10 T30 device n
246. rotocol 3 Poor neu EET UH Modbus RTU Communications Optional DeviceNet Optional DeviceNet DeviceNet Comunicazioni seriali Profibus Profibus 2 Profibus DP LonWorks LonWorks CANopen GDNet CANopen CANopen w sin encoder 0 2 w DE Con encoder sinusoidale Con encoder digitale 0 2 1 1 2 wl sin encoder 1000 1 w DE 2 Con encoder sinusoidale con encoder digitale 1000 1 3 RS485 port is used for programming PC and control Modbus com munication standard in all the drive series 3 La porta seriale RS485 utilizzata per la programmazione PC e controllo comunicazione Modbus standard in tutti i drive gt Referred to standard 4 poles motor 4 Riferito a motori standard 4 poli Automation Solutions more complete and integrated Torque Vector Vettoriale di coppia 1 250 Hp 0 75 200 kW Flux Vector Vettoriale di flusso Specifications Specifiche 1 700 Hp 0 75 630 kW 2 450 Hp 1 5 315 kW Digital DC Convertitori Digitali 20 4800 A 230 575 Vac 3ph 230 690 Vac 3ph 230 480 Vac 3ph 230 690 Vac 3ph 0 5 1 0 01 1 absolute 0 01 1 3 10V differential 3 10V differenziali 33 10V differential 3 10V differenziali 2 10V differential 2 10V differenziali 3 10V differential 3 10V differenziali 3 10V 2 10V 2 10V 2 10V 8 8 8 4 2 static and 2 relays
247. rounding between the U V W and motor ld No No Reduce the load or Yes increase the power Check if load is too large of AC motor drive No No No No Reduce torque compensation Reduce torque compensation M Check if Checki acceleration time deceleration time is too short by is too short by load inertia load inertia Yes Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise Please No Has load changed contact Gefran 4 suddenly Yes v v Yes acceleration Yes Can deceleration time be made longer time be made longer No No Increase accel decel Reduce load or increase time the power of AC motor drive v Reduce load or increase Check braking the power of AC motor drive method Please contact Gefran ADV50 SW PW 1 10 CTL V2 10 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5 2 Ground Fault GFF Ground fault 5 3 Over Voltage OV 1 output circuit cable or motor of AC motor drive gt grounded due to noise Please contact Gefran Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation ves Remove ground fault Over voltage Reduce voltage to be within spec No Is voltage within specification Yes Yes Has
248. s Loss of ACI Signal 4 20mA Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to OHz 1 Coast to stop and display AErr 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command Ea This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost Ea When set to 1 it will display warning message AErr on the keypad in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting When ACI signal is recovered the warning message will stop blinking Please press RESET key to clear it EE Up Down Mode Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 By digital keypad up down keys mode 1 Based on Accel Decel Time acc to Pr 01 09 to 01 12 2 Constant speed acc to Pr 02 08 3 Pulse input unit acc to Pr 02 08 ES Rate of Change of UP DOWN Operation with Unit 0 01 Constant Speed Settings 0 01 10 00 Hz 2ms Factory Setting 0 01 Ea These parameters determine the increase decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi function Inputs when Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 are set to 10 Up command or 11 Down command Ea When Pr 02 07 is set to 0 increase decrease the frequency by using UP DOWN key It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running 600Hz 50 0Hz 0 t sec 4 34s 3 285 3 685 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 59 Chapter 4 Parameters When 02 07 is set to 1 increase decrease the frequency by acceleration deceleration settings It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running m
249. s The specified parameter setting The actual value stored in the specified parameter External Fault End displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have been accepted After a parameter value has been set the new value is automatically stored in memory To modify an entry use the A keys displays if the input is invalid Communication Error Please check the AC motor drive user manual Chapter 5 Group 9 Communication Parameter for more details B 6 3 Operation Flow Chart MEMORY KB ADV20 50 Operation Flow Chart Press UP DOWN key to change frequency commands hk press RIGHT LEFT key to adjus number MODE MODE MODE Y v 22 _ SAuE MODE Press UP key to select SAVE or READ Press PROG DATA for about 2 seconds or until it is flashing then save parameters from KB to AC drive or read parameters from AC drive to KB MODE gt a Change value 4 f E ERR END write in Write in Cannot Succeed to ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 7 KB ADV50 Appendix B Accessories B 7 1 Description of the Digital Keypad KB ADV50
250. s PLE PLUS Disable Read write PLC program into AC drives L You don t need to care about the PLC warning such as PLod PLSv and PIdA before downloading a program to ADV50 2 Connection Please connect RJ 45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485 to RS232 converter RS485 3 Run the program The PLC status will always be PLC2 even if the AC motor drive is switched off There are three ways to operate PLC A In PLC1 page execute PLC program B In PLC2 page execute stop PLC program by using WPL software C After setting multi function input terminals MI3 to MI9 to 23 RUN STOP PLC it will display PLC1 for executing PLC when the terminal is ON It will display PLCO to stop PLC program when terminals are OFF gt Ira When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode Moreover when it is PLC2 you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 2 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function gt ta When power on after power off the PLC status will be in PLC1 Warning A This RUN instruction wil affect the state of the connected PLC Oo you wish to continue 7 4 When you are in PLC2 please remember to change to PLC1 when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program gt When output input terminals MI1 MI9 Relay1 Rela
251. s On when running and it is On when the status is set to RUN R M1001 Normally closed contact b contact This contact is Off in running and it is Off when the status is set to RUN M1002 On only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get positive pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN Initial pulse is contact a It will get negative pulse in the RUN moment Pulse width scan period M1004 Reserved M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives M1006 Output frequency is 0 M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives FWD 0 REV 1 M1008 Reserved M1009 Reserved M1010 Reserved M1011 10ms clock pulse 5ms On 5ms Off M1012 100ms clock pulse 50ms On 50ms Off M1013 1s clock pulse 0 55 On 0 5s Off M1014 1min clock pulse 30s On 30s Off M1015 Frequency attained M1016 Parameter read write error M1017 Succeed to write parameter M1018 Enable high speed counter function When M1028 On M1019 Reserved M1020 Zero flag M1021 Borrow flag M1022 Carry flag M1023 Divisor is 0 M1024 Reserved M1025 RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Specia
252. s em Tap er ee eae amp Synchronization speed detection Output current A iz Keep accelerating H PE 9 mE Time FWD Run roid 1 i Fig3 Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart 4 106 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 08 07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search BB Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 5 0 sec Factory Setting 0 5 En When momentary power loss is detected the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait for a specified period of time determined by Pr 08 07 called Base Block Time before resuming operation This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault Pr 08 15 When using a PG card with PG encoder speed search will begin at the actual PG encoder feedback speed Current Limit for Speed Search Unit 1 Settings 30 to 200 Factory Setting 150 Following a momentary power loss the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr 08 08 When the output current is less than the value of Pr 08 08 the AC motor drive output frequency is at speed synchronization point The drive will star
253. s falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of 1 ORF X1 X1 falling edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function PLS Rising edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 0 159 T0 15 C0 C7 00 029 v Y T Explanations When X0 OFF ON rising edge trigger PLS command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 44 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of MO PLS MO rising edge output SET LD Load the contact A of MO Timing Diagram SET YO YO latched ON xo MO time YO Mnemonic Function PLF Falling edge output X0 X17 YO Y17 0 159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand ES Y Y zs Explanations When X07 ON OFF falling edge trigger PLF command will be executed and MO will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD X0 Load A contact of XO MO PLF MO MO falling edge output LD Load the contact A of MO SET YO YO latched ON Timing Diagram X0 l MO a scan time YO ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 45 Appendix
254. s on REV LED blinks When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward 10B FWD LED blinks REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse 11B FWD LED is off REV LED is on When AC motor drive runs reverse Bit 5 7 Reserved 1 Master frequency Controlled by communication Bit 8 interface Bit 9 1 Master frequency controlled by analog signal 1 Operation command controlled by Bit 10 S be NS communication interface Bit 11 15 Reserved 2102H Frequency command F 2103H Output frequency H 2104H Output current AXXX X 2105H Reserved 2106H Reserved 2107H Reserved 2108H DC BUS Voltage UXXX X 2109H Output voltage EXXX X 210AH Display temperature of IGBT C 2116H User defined Low word 2117H User defined High word Note 2116H is number display of Pr 00 04 High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr 00 04 3 6 Exception response The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 127 Chapter 4 Parameters The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error thus the 4 128 AC motor drive has no response The master device will eventually process a timeout condition The AC
255. s parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control formula is Output Frequency Limit Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 X Pr 10 07 This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr 01 07 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting 60 0 This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before warning see Pr 10 09 is given It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time If this parameter is set to 0 0 the system would not detect any abnormality signal 10 09 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals for PID feedback error Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating This function is only for ACI signal 4 134 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters En AC motor drive action when the feedback signals analog PID feedback are abnormal according to Pr 10 16 EN Over the PID Detection Value Unit 0 1 0 0 to 10 0 Settings Factory Setting 1 0 This function is only for ACI signal E This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value Refer to PID control block diagram in Pr 10 06 for detail 10 11 Source of PID Set point Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0H
256. s will increase according to the extension card The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows 4 66 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters used Weights 27 2 2 of 9 9 of 2 1 Used by PLC Bit 7 615 4 3 2 1 0 4 Relay 1 MO1 MO2 RA2 MO3 RA3 MO4 RA4 5 5 MO6 RA6 MO7 RA7 Ea For example when Pr 03 09 is set to 3 decimal 00000011 binary that indicates Relay1 and are used by 03 09 2 2 3 used Weights 27 2 2 2 2 9 2 2 1 UsedbyPLC Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 Relay 1 MO1 MO2 RA2 MO4 RA4 5 5 MO7 RA7 The Analog Output Used by PLC Settings Read Only Factory setting BitO 1 AFM used by PLC Bit1 1 AO1 used by PLC Bit2 1 AO2 used by PLC Ea The equivalent 1 bit is used to display the status used or not used of each analog output The value that Pr 03 10 displays is the result after converting 1 bit binary into decimal value 2 1 0 2 2 2 O not used 1 Used by PLC Bt 2 7 0 optional AO2 optional For Example If Pr 03 10 displays 1 it means that AFM is used by PLC ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 67 Chapter 4 Parameters EE Brake Release Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 EN Brake Engage Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Settin
257. sed e to large load please reduce load Increase the setting of torque compensation 5 6 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 5 10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed Modify the setting If the execution time is too long ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Motor can run but cannot change speed Check the setting of the max frequency is too low Yes No Check to see i out of range u boundaries frequency is pper lower No Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Modify the setting due to noise Please contact G i Press UP DOWN key If finishe i y Yes es executing PLC Ifthe PLC progran No to see if speed has program Yes is executed any change No z i a If there is any change y i es Checkifthe PLC E fee ai one program is correc i T 4 20mA Check if the wiring between No MI1 MI6 to is correct No No Check if the wiring of external terminal is correct Correct Yes wiring i Check if frequency for each step is different Change defective S potentiometer Change frequencysetting No Check if accel decel time is set correctly Yes Please set suitable accel decel time by load inertia gt Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
258. set M1028 On The counter C235 will be ON when the count number target value If you want to clear C235 please set M1029 ON Please use rising edge falling edge command such as LDP LDF for the contact condition Please notice that error may occur when using contact A B for the contact condition There are three input modes for high speed counter in the following can be set by D1044 a A B phase mode D1044 0 user can input the A and B pulse for counting Make sure that A i B and GND are grounding Pulse signal mode D1044 1 user can count by pulse input or signal A is for pulse and B is for signal Make sure that A A B and GND are grounding Pulse flag mode D1044 2 user can count by M1030 Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that A and GND are grounding Program Example 1 Assume that when M100 ON it is set to phase mode When M101 ON it is set to pulse signal mode When M102 ON it is set to pulse flag mode M1030 is used to set to count up OFF and count down ON If MO goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 2 to H 3 or from H 4 to H 3 M3 will be always be ON ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 59 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function 4 If M1 goes from OFF to ON DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high speed counter When C235 goes from H 1004F to 10050 or from H 10051 to H 10050 M2 will be alwa
259. sformer for AC motor drive 2 Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive 3 If phase lead capacitors are used never on the AC motor drive output use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics 3 3 serial reactor T phase lead capacitor W Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan the cooling will be bad at low speeds causing the motor to overheat Besides high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range 1 Use a motor with independent ventilation forced external cooling or increase the motor rated power 2 Use a special inverter duty motor 3 Do NOT run at low speeds for long time 5 10 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6 1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages Once a fault is detected the corresponding protective functions will be activated The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication gt Drama Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal 6 1 1 Common Pro
260. ssage and Error Control message Refer to CiA website http www can cia org for details Gefran CANopen supports functions W Support CAN2 0A Protocol W Support CANopen DS301 V4 02 W Support DSP 402 V2 0 Gefran CANopen supports services W PDO Process Data Objects PDO1 PDO2 W SDO Service Data Object Initiate SDO Download Initiate SDO Upload Abort SDO SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node W SOP Special Object Protocol Support default COB ID in Predefined Master Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4 02 Support SYNC service Support Emergency service W NMT Network Management Support NMT module control Support NMT Error control Support Boot up Gefran CANopen doesn t support service W Time Stamp service ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 D 1 Appendix D CANopen Function D 1 Overview D 1 1 CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN based higher layer protocol and was designed for motion oriented machine control networks such as handling systems Version 4 of CANopen CiA 0 301 is standardized as EN50325 4 The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile DS301 as well as a framework for programmable devices CiA 302 recommendations for cables and connectors CiA 303 1 and SI units and prefix representations CiA 303 2 Device Profile Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA
261. ssipate away heat generated by braking When the braking resistor heats up the resistance would increase with temperature and braking torque would decrease accordingly Suggest cycle time is one minute 100 ED 1 0 100 T1 Braking Time Cycle Time 9 For safety reasons install a thermal overload relay between braking unit and braking resistor Together with the magnetic contactor MC in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the braking resistor against damage due to frequent braking or in case the braking unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the braking resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 2 NFB R L1 B ou ME S L2 T T L3 6 Thermal Overload SA Relay or Surge temperature Absorber R L1 U T1 S L2 VIT2 T L3 W T3 ADV50 Series P N 8 P 1 N Braking Unit B2 Appendix B Accessories Thermal Overload Relay 20 1 Braking i BR Resistor Temperature P M aR OED REST ETS Switch Note1 When using t
262. st be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit 01 07 The Output Frequency Lower Limit value Pr 01 00 Pr 01 08 100 Acceleration Time 1 Taccel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 URBIUM Deceleration Time 1 Tdecel 1 Unit 0 1 0 01 Acceleration Time 2 Taccel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 Deceleration Time 2 Tdecel 2 Unit 0 1 0 01 Settings 0 1 to 600 0 sec 0 01 to 600 0 sec Factory Setting 10 0 co Acceleration deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3 MI12 to 7 set Pr 04 05 Pr 04 08 to 7 or Pr 11 06 Pr 11 11 to 7 EENM Time Unit Settings 0 Unit 0 1 sec 1 Unit 0 01 sec 4 44 Factory Setting 0 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Ea The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 The rate is linear unless S Curve is Enabled see Pr 01 17 Ea The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency Pr 01 00 down to 0 Hz The rate is linear unless S Curve is Enabled see Pr 01 18 Ea The Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 3 4 are selected according to the Multi function Input Terminals Settings See Pr 04 05 to Pr 04 08 for more details the diagram shown below the Acceleration Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between
263. stant speed in the skip frequency Pumps and fans machine vibrations range Three skip frequency ranges can be set 4 34 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Carrier Frequency Setting Chapter 4 Parameters rs Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters The carrier frequency can be 02 03 General application Low noise increased when required to reduce motor noise Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost ae i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the frequency command is lost 02 06 m For continuous by system malfunction the AC motor Air conditioners operation drive can still run Suitable for intelligent air conditioners Output Signal during Running i Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters Signal available to stop braking brake 03 00 03 01 Provide a sianal for release when the AC motor drive is General application runnin Sons running This signal will disappear 9 when the AC motor drive is free running Output Signal in Zero Speed CNET 2 Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequency is lower 03 00 03 01 LA on Provide a signal for than the min output frequency a General application ER running status signal is given for external system or control wiring Output Signal at Desired Frequency M diag Related Applications Purpose Functions Parameters When the output frequen
264. stop Ea When the 2 switch on the upper right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram the motor stop method Pr 02 02 will force setting to 1 This setting Pr 02 02 can t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF Ea The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault Ramp the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency Pr 01 05 according to the deceleration time and then stops Coast the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped 1 It is recommended to use ramp to stop for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped The deceleration time has to be set accordingly ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 53 Chapter 4 Parameters 2 motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large it is recommended to select coast to stop For example blowers punching machines centrifuges and pumps Frequency Frequency output output frequency aslo motor motor speed speed Time Time stops according tq freeruntostop operation decel eration time operation command RUN STO
265. t In this circuit the total delay time from input TMR T11 Kn1 Tii rwn km is close and output Y1 is ON n1 n2 T where T is clock period T12 2 T12 Y1 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 18 C 4 PLC Devices Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 4 1 Summary of ADV50 PLC Device Number Items Specifications Remarks Control Method Stored program cyclic scan system I O Processing Method Batch processing when END instruction is executed refresh instruction is available Execution Speed Basic commands minimum 0 24 us Application commands 10 hundreds us Program Language Instruction Ladder Logic SFC Including the Step commands Program Capacity 500 STEPS SRAM Battery 28 basic commands Commands 45 commands 17 application commands Input Output Contact Input X 6 output Y 2 X0 X17 16 points Correspond to external Input Relay octal number system TOtal is input point 32 Y External Output Relay 0 17 16 points points Correspond to external octal number system output point For general iu 160 Total is 2 poinis Contacts can switch to M Auxiliary 192 lon Off in program ET M1000 M1031 32 points lt m prog points p When the timer Total is indicated by 5 command attains the T Timer 100ms timer TO T15 16 points
266. t MER E C 3 4 The Example for Designing Basic Program Start Stop and Latching In the same occasions it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch Therefore if you want to keep the action you should design latching circuit There are several latching circuits in the following Example 1 the latching circuit for priority of stop TART When start normally open contact X1 On stop Y1 normally contact X2 Off Y1 On are set at x STOP the same time if X2 On the coil Y1 will stop acting Therefore it calls priority of stop Example 2 the latching circuit for priority of start When start normally open contact X1 On stop 1 normally contact X2 Off and Y1 On coil Y1 will START Y1 be active and latching are valid at the same time if X2 On coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact Therefore it calls priority of start ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 X2 STOP Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Example 3 the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made Priority of stop x1 up of RST and SET command L set y1 X2 It is top priority of stop when RST command is set RST Y1 behind SET command When executing PLC from up to down The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same tim
267. t ti BR optional 0 0 0 Fuse NFB None Fuse Breaker me B1 2 RLI 6 gt Dur u T1 O S L2 O o S L2 Recommended Circuit b when power supply Factory setting NPN Mode NEN Factory Tee setting Please refer to Figure 7 for wiring of NPN mode and PNP mode Factory setting ACI Mode AVI ACI AVI switch When switching to AVI it indicates AVI2 Main circuit power terminals D 24V Oo MI2 Multi step 2 MIA Multi step3 b MIS Multi step4 5 MI6 t RA Multi function contact output 240Vac 2 5A Max RB 120Vac 5A Max F 28Vdc 5AMax A Factory setting is malfunction indication MO1 Factory setting Drive is in operation vo 48V50mA Max L A Multi function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi function Output Terminal AFM c Digital Signal Common igna 9g DCM 1 factory setting Analog freq EQ i current meter 0 10VDC 2mA Analog Signal common Factory setting output frequency m r0 10V i Power supply RS 485 serial interface 10V 20 5KQ 2 OAVI 1 Reserved i i Master Frequency 2 EV 1 to 10V 47K 2 3 GND 4 SG 4 20mA 0 10V Ber d Reserve Q ACM 8 lt 1 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Analog Signal Common Toa m O ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 ntrol circuit ter
268. t step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed When this is done a complete 8 bit byte will have been processed ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 123 Chapter 4 Parameters Step 6 Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8 bit byte of the command message Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value When transmitting the CRC value in the message the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped i e the lower order byte will be transmitted first The following is an example of CRC generation using C language The function takes two arguments Unsigned char data lt a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length lt the quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer Unsigned int crc_chk unsigned char data unsigned char length int j unsigned int reg_crc OxFFFF while length reg crc data for j 0 j lt 8 j if reg crc amp Ox01 LSB b0 1 reg crc reg crc 1 0 001 Jelse reg crc reg crc gt gt 1 return reg_crc 3 5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below Content Address Function GG means parameter group nn means parameter number AC drive for example the address of Pr 04 01 is 0401H Refer to GGnnH chapter 5 for the function of each parameter When reading Parame
269. t to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss Maximum Allowable Maximum Power Power Loss Time Allowable Power Input Synchronization Speed Search 08 04 1 08 04 2 Output Baseblock Time Baseblock Time Frequency 08 06 08 06 Output Voltage c ee d Momentary Power Loss Operation Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit 0 01 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 107 Chapter 4 Parameters Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit 0 01 Skip Frequency Lower Limit Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0Hz Factory Setting 0 00 These parameters set the Skip Frequencies It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output These six parameters should be set as follows 08 09 gt 08 10 gt Pr 08 11 gt Pr 08 12 gt Pr 08 13 gt Pr 08 14 Ea The frequency ranges may be overlapping internal frequency command setting frequency Auto Restart After Fault Unit 1 Settings 0 to 10 Factory Setting 0 0 Disable Ea Only after an over current OC or over voltage OV fault occurs the AC motor drive can be reset restarted automatically up to 10 times Setting this parameter to 0 wi
270. t when M2 ON 1 is set to 1 frequency is inputted by digital keypad S271 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 62 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function unit 0 01 S3 0 and S4 0 4 D1027 frequency command controlled by PID MO M1 M2 M1000 API Mnemonic Operands Function 142 FREQ 1 2 3 Operation control of the AC motor drive Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps KnY KnM T D FREQ FREQP 7 steps 1 S2 S3 Operands S1 frequency command S2 acceleration time S3 deceleration time Explanation 1 This command can control frequency command acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive Please use M1025 to RUN ON STOP OFF the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction FWD ON REV OFF Program Example 1 M1025 RUN ON STOP Off the AC motor drive M1026 operation direction of the AC motor drive FWD OFF REV ON M1015 frequency is reached 2 When M10 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300 3 00Hz and acceleration deceleration time is 0 3 When M11 ON setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000 30 00Hz acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 63 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function M1000 0 M11 1 M10 ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 C 64
271. tage 10 x 100 For Example When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts adjust Pr 03 04 to 50 If Pr 03 03 is set to 0 then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency 4 64 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters gt Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter To increase the internal counter one of Pr 04 05 to 04 08 should be set to 12 Upon completion of counting the specified output terminal will be activated Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 10 Ea When the display shows c555 the drive has counted 555 times If display shows c555e it means that real counter value is between 5 550 and 5 559 ETE Preliminary Count Value Unit 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting 0 Ea When the counter value reaches this value the corresponding multi function output terminal will be activated provided one of Pr 03 00 to Pr 03 01 set to 11 Preliminary Count Value Setting This multi function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal Count Value Attained timing diagram Display 0000 copa lt 0002 lt 0003 0004 0005 c000 c0002 2 4 Pr 00 04 1 TRG Counter Trigger 2 The width of trigger signal 9 03 01 11 03 05 5 03 06 3 should not be less than i 2ms lt 250 Hz Terminal Count Value Pr 03 00 Pr 03 0
272. tal I O 1KV Analog amp Communication I O 1KV Damped Oscillatory Wave Power Line 1KV Digital 1KV RS IEC 61131 2 IEC 61000 4 3 26MHz 1GHz 10V m Operation 0 C 55 C Temperature 50 95 Humidity Pollution Environment degree 2 Storage 40 C 70 C Temperature 5 95 Humidity Standard IEC1131 2 IEC 68 2 6 TEST Fc IEC1131 2 amp IEC 68 2 27 Resistance TEST Ea Certifications Standard IEC 61131 2 UL508 B 9 4 3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port To connect with CANopen use the connector enclosed with EXP CAN ADV20 50 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring Pin Signal Content 1 CAN GND Ground 0V V 2 CAN L Signal 3 SHIELD Shield 12345 4 CAN H Signal 5 Reserved Baud Rate Setting 1 89 Rotary switch BR sets up the communication speed CANopen network in hex Setup range 0 7 8 F are forbidden 193 BR Example If you need to set up the communication speed of EXP CAN ADV20 50 as 500K simply switch BR to 5 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 B 30 Appendix B Accessories BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1M MAC ID Setting o 8g 189 1 7 Rotary switches ID_L ID_H set up the b b A Node ID on CANopen network in hex Setup o range 00 7F 80 FF are forbidden 93 03 ID H ID L Example If you need to set up th
273. tal inputs and used for NPN mode Resistive Load 5A N O 3A N C 240VAC 5A N O 3A N C 24VDC Inductive Load 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 240VAC 1 5A N O 0 5A N C 24VDC Refer to Pr 03 00 for programming Maximum 48VDC 50mA Refer to Pr 03 01 for programming Max 48Vdc MO1 DCM 50mA yy MCM internal circuit Common for Multi function Outputs 10VDC 3mA ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Terminal Factory Settings NPN mode Terminal Function Symbol ON Connect to DCM Analog voltage Input Impedance 47kQ TOV AVI circuit Resolution 10 bits Range 0 10VDC AVI 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 internal circuit Set up Pr 04 11 Pr 04 14 04 19 04 23 acm Analog control signal Common for AVI ACI AFM common Analog current Input Impedance 2500 cer l crew Resolution 10 bits Range 4 20 ACI 0 Max Output Frequency Pr 01 00 Selection Pr 02 00 Pr 02 09 Pr 10 00 internal circuit Set up Pr 04 15 Pr 04 18 Analog output meter 0 to 10V 2mA Impedance 100 Output current 2mA max AFM 0 10V x n potentiometer Resolution 8 bits Maama Range 0 10VDC internalcircuit Function Pr 03 03 to Pr 03 04 NOTE Control signal wiring size 18 AWG 0 75 mm with shielded wire Analog inputs AVI A
274. tall lt Prevention enabled X s s 1 previous deceleration time 1 actual time to decelerate to stop when over voltage stall prevention is enabled ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 91 Chapter 4 Parameters oso Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit 1 Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable A setting of 100 is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive During acceleration the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr 06 01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor When this function is enabled the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value 06 01 Over Current 4 output current Detection 7 Level setting 1 frequency Over Current Stall 1 prevention during 1 Acceleration Output i frequency held Frequency I 1 T time eo 1 previous acceleration time 1 i 1 actual acceleration time when over current stall prevention is enabled Over current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit 1 Settings 20 to 250 Factory Setting 170 0 disable Ifthe output current exceeds the setting specified Pr 06 02 when the drive is operating the drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall If the out
275. temperature When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space e g cabinet the surrounding temperature must be within 10 40 C with good ventilation DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation Prevent fiber particles scraps of paper saw dust metal particles etc from adhering to the heatsink When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in between When installing one AC motor drive below another one use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 1 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Installation with Metal Separation Installation without Metal Separation 120mm ODE iA Y Loy TEJ 120mm 150mm Frame A Frame B and C Frame Frame B and C 1 2 2 DC bus Sharing Connecting the DC bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1 The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel Only the same power system can be connected in parallel ag FON It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel no limit in horsepower 1 10 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 1 Introduction power should be applied at the sam
276. terion Dail Half One Year Year If there are any loose screws and Tighten the screws and press the connectors connectors firmly in place If there is any peculiar smell and Visual inspection and smell color change If there is any crack damage Visual inspection deformation or corrosion If there is any leaked liquid or A deformation in capacitors Visual inspection ADV50 SW PW 1 11 CTL V2 11 6 9 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance Cooling fan of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Dail Half One Year Year Visual aural inspection and turn the If there is any abnormal sound or fan with hand turn off the power vibration before operation to see if it rotates smoothly If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw If there is any change of color due to overheating Change fan 9 Ventilation channel of cooling system 6 10 Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any obstruction in the Visual inspection heat sink air intake or air outlet ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Appendix A Specifications Appendix A Specifications There are 230V and 460V models in the ADV50 series For 0 5 to 3HP of the 230V models there are 1 phase 3 phase models Refer to following specifications for details Voltage Class 230V Class
277. ters parameter by command code 03H only one parameter can be read at one time 4 124 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Content Address Function 00B No function 01B Stop 10B Run 11B Jog Run Bit 0 1 Bit 2 3 Reserved 00B No function 2000H 01B FWD Command BRAS 10B REV Write only 11B Change direction 00B Comm forced 1st accel decel Bit 6 7 01B Comm forced 2nd accel decel Bit 8 15 Reserved 2001H Frequency command Bit 0 1 EF external fault on 2002H Bit 1 1 Reset Bit 2 15 Reserved Status Error code monitor 2100H 0 No error occurred Read only Over current oc Over voltage ov Overheat 1 Power Board Overheat 0H2 Overload oL Overload oL1 Overload2 oL2 External fault EF w n Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel e Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel ocd pre Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation ocn 12 Ground Fault GFF ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 125 Chapter 4 Parameters 4 126 Content Address Function Status monitor Read only 2100H 13 Low voltage Lv 14 PHL Phase Loss 15
278. the momentary power loss occurs this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method When the power is on again motor will run again after DEB return time for high speed axis application Ca Status 1 Insufficient power supply due to momentary power loss unstable power due to low voltage sudden heavy load DC BUS voltage The levelfor DEB return time it doesn t need Lv 30V 58V multi function terminals The level for soft start relay to be ON Lv level power side DEB function is activated Output frequency DEB return time 085 L Imus When Pr 08 25 is set to 0 the AC motor drive will be stopped and won t re start atthe power on again a Status 2 unexpected power off such as momentary power loss ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 111 Chapter 4 Parameters DC BUS voltage The level for DEB return time Lv 30V 58V The level for soft start relay to be ON Lv 30 Lv level Soft start relay at power side DEB function is activated Output frequency DEB return time 4 112 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 9 Communication Parameters There is a built in RS 485 serial interface marked RJ 45 near to the control terminals The pins are defined below RS 485 8 1 Serial interface 1 Reserved 2 EV 3 GND 4 SG 5 SG 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved Each ADV50 AC motor drive has a pre assigned
279. the operation result gt 32 767 carry flag M1022 On Program Example 1 16 bit command When On the content in DO will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored D20 ADD DO D10 020 Flags the positive negative sign of the values 16 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag Y YON CN 2 1 0 32 768 4 1 0 1 32 767 0 1 2 The highest bit The highest bit Borrowflag of the data of the data Garry tag 1 negative 0 positive 32 bit Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag P Ws E 2 1 0 2 147 483 648 4 1 0 1 2 147 483 647 0 1 2 The highest bit 3 Borrow fla The highest bit 3 of the data of the data Carry flag 1 negative 0 positive ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 52 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function API Mnemonic Operands Function 21 SUB P S4 S2 D Subtraction Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps X Y M K H KnY D SUB SUBP 7 steps S DSUB DSUBP 13 steps S els E E z D E Operands S1 Minuend 52 Subtrahend D Remainder Explanations 1 This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D 2 Thehighest bit is symbolic bit O and 1 which is suitable for algebraic subtraction 3 Flag changes in binary subtraction In 16 bit instruction
280. tion No Check put voltage is normal Yes It can run when no faults occur Input RUN command 5 Maybe motor drive has malfunction misoperation due to noise Please contact Gefran by keypad Press RUN key to check if it can run Press UP key to set frequency tyes No Check if input FWD or REV command Press UP to check if motor q Nes canrun i No No No Set frequency or not Modify frequency Yes setting if upper bound freq and setting freq is lower than the min output freq Check if there is any output voltage from terminals U V and Motor has malfunction lt Ifload ist Check if the setting of torque No large Check if the wiring of terminal FWD and between REV DCM is correct Yes Change switch or relay Correct connection IN o Check if the parameter setting and wiring of analog signal and multi step speed Change defective potentiometer and relay Yes are correct Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction No Please contact Gefran Connect correctly compensation is correct Motor is locked du For example if there is a brake check if it is relea
281. tion Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position Settings 0 00 to 600 00 sec Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Unit 0 01 Factory Setting 0 00 This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation area When the multi function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr 01 20 to Pr 01 25 and get the final position Ea This is simple position function NOT the precision position function tx t2 je Ml 25 t 1 sen 2 Assume that the radius of the 4 pole motor is and rotation speed is rpm n P Ea Example 1 Assume that motor speed is 50Hz the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec Pr 01 25 2 and the deceleration time from 50Hz to OHz is 10 seconds The rotation speed n 120 X 50 4 rpm min 25 rpm sec The revolution numbers 25 X 2 12 2 175 revolutions 4 48 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters gt lt gt ieee 2sec 10sec Therefore the distance revolution numbers X circumference 175 X 2 It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles Example 2 Assume that motor speed is 1 5Hz the delay time at 10Hz
282. tion and deceleration are smooth If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad please operate by the following steps 1 Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive correctly 2 After applying the power verify that LED display shows F 0 0Hz 3 Set Pr 02 00 0 and Pr 02 01 0 Refer to v Appendix operation flow for detail s 4 Press key to set frequency to around uc 5Hz v E Ly 5 Press key for forward running And if you want to change to reverse running EUN you should press in m page And if you want to decelerate to stop please press N 6 Check following items W Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct W Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration W Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth If the results of trial run are normal please start the formal run 3 4 ADV50 lt lt Faas EM a 44 5 e m ca 44 AN 4 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters The ADV50 parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting In most applications the user can finish all parameter settings before start up without the need for re adjustment during operation The 14 groups are as follows Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Gr
283. tion of the contacts rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 LD X0 Load A contact of XO 0 17 X1 X1 rising edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDF Falling edge series connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y v A v v i Explanations ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation X1 LD X0 Load A contact of XO n ANDF 1 X1 falling edge detection in series connection OUT Y1 Drive 1 coil Mnemonic Function ORP Rising edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 M0O M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 43 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s rising edge detection Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load A contact of XO 1 X1 X1 rising edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORF Falling edge parallel connection X0 X17 YO Y17 MO M159 T0 15 C0 C7 D0 D29 Operand Y Y v v v Explanations The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact
284. trol is by PID ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 137 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 11 Multi function Input Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11 parameters See Appendix B for details Multi function Output Terminal MO2 RA2 Multi function Output Terminal MO3 RA3 Multi function Output Terminal MO4 RA4 Multi function Output Terminal MO5 RA5 Multi function Output Terminal MO6 RA6 Multi function Output Terminal MO7 RA7 Settings 0 to 23 Factory Setting 0 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is 5 Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting Active when Command Frequency is lower than the 3 Zero Speed oA Minimum Output Frequency Active as long as over torque is detected Refer to 06 03 4 Over Torque Detection Pr 06 05 Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off Baseblock B B j 5 during baseblock Base block can be forced by Multi Indication function input setting 09 6 Low Voltage Indication Active when low voltage Lv is detected 7 Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal Active when a fault occurs oc ov oH oL oL1 EF cF3 8 Fault Indicati
285. ue of V R digital keypad 0 10V corresponds to 0 1023 R Bice Reserved 01036 PLC error code R D1037 D1039 Reserved D1040 Analog output value R W D1041 D1042 Reserved 01043 User defined when Pr 00 04 is set to 2 the register data will be RIW displayed as C xxx 01044 High speed counter mode R W C 4 10 Communication Addresses for Devices only for PLC2 mode Device Range Type Address Hex 00 17 octal Bit 0400 040F Y 00 17 octal Bit 0500 050F T 00 15 Bit word 0600 060F M 000 159 Bit 0800 089F M 1000 1031 Bit OBE8 0C07 C 0 7 Bit word 0 00 0 07 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 28 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Device Range Type Address Hex D 00 63 Word 1000 101D D 1000 1044 Word 13E8 1414 NOTE when it is in PLC1 mode the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device For example address 0400H will correspond to Pr 04 00 NOT C 4 11 Function Code only for PLC2 mode Function Code Description Supported Devices 01 Read coil status T 02 Read input status X T 03 Read one data T C D 05 Force changing one coil status T 06 Write in one data T C D OF Force changing multiple coil status T 10 Write in multiple data T C D 5 Commands C 5 1 Basic Commands Commands Function Operands LD Load contact A X Y M T C LDI
286. ulti function Display 0 Display the content of user defined unit Uxxx 1 Display the counter value c 2 Display PLC D1043 value C 3 Display DC BUS voltage u 4 Display output voltage E 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value b 6 Output power factor angle n 4 2 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters 7 Factory Parameter Explanation Settings Setting Customer 7 Display output power P 8 Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current t 9 Display AVI 1 V 10 Display ACI AVI2 i mA V 11 Display the temperature of IGBT h C 12 Display 2 level 1 13 Display AVI4 ACI3 level 1 14 Display PG speed in RPM G 15 Display motor number M User Defined 00 05 Coefficient K 0 1 to 160 0 1 0 00 06 Power Board Read only HH Software Version 00 07 Control Board Read only H H Software Version 00 08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00 09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 0 V f Control 00 10 Control Method 0 1 Vector Control 00 11 Reserved 50Hz Base Voltage 0 230V 400V 00 12 0 Selection 1 220V 380V Group 1 Basic Parameters Factory Expianaton Ses Setting customer 01 00 Maximum Output 50 00 to 600 0 Hz 60 00 Frequency Fmax Maximum Voltage 01 01 Frequency Fbase 0 10 to 600 0 Hz Motor 0 Maximum Output 230V series 0 1V to 255 0V 01 02 Voltag
287. um output frequency Pr 01 05 Ea This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 105 Chapter 4 Parameters Output frequency H EA Stop output voltage 1 1 1 1 1 Output voltage V ey Disable B B signal 1 aiting time 08 07 waiting time 08 0 1 i i Input B B signal 08 08 Current Limit Speed Search for Speed hSpeed Synchronization speed detection Output current A Time 1 1 FWD Run 1 1 Fig 1 B B Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level Output frequency H 08 08 Current Limit for Speed SearchSpeed Input signal Stop output voltage 3 Disable signal Waiting time 08 07 Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run B B Fig 2 B B Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart Speed Search Current doesn t Attain Speed Search Level 7 Input signal Output frequency H 1 anm NN Stop output voltage o 09 i Disable B B signal 1 06 01 E Waiting time 08 07 Over current A i pod stall prevention A i Restart during acceleration f pi
288. umber W To be operand in application command such as MOV K123 DO K constant 4 BCD Binary Code Decimal BCD It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7 segment display to be display 5 Hexadecimal Number HEX The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in ADV50 PLC system W To be operand in application command For example MOV H1A2B DO constant H Constant K In PLC it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number For example K100 means 100 in decimal number Exception The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X Y M S will be bit byte word or double word For example K2Y10 KAM100 K1 means a 4 bit data and K2 K4 can be 8 12 and 16 bit data separately Constant H In PLC it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number For example H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number C 4 4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y It is unlimited usage times in program User can control loop by using auxiliary relay but can t drive external load directly There are two types divided by its characteristics 1 Auxiliary relay for general It will reset to Off when power loss during running Its state will be Off when power on after po
289. unter s value when the counter achieved specific set value value of counter 7 the setting value motion of the contact is as follows NO Normally Open contact Continuity NC Normally Closed contact Non continuity 2 If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged To re count or to conduct the CLEAR motion please use the RST command Program Example Ladder diagram Command code Operation LD Load contact A of XO C2 count Hien Tes _ CNT C2K100 Setting is K100 Mnemonic Function MCR Master control Start Reset Operand NO N7 Explanations 1 MC is the main control start command When the MC command is executed the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted When MC command is OFF the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows The counting value is set back to zero the coil and the contact are both turned OFF The coil is OFF and the timer value and the contact stay at their Accumulative timer present condition The counting value is back to zero Both coil and contact are Subroutine timer turned OFF The coil is OFF and the counting value and the contact stay at Counter their present condition ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 40 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Coils driven up by th
290. wer loss 2 Auxiliary relay for special Each special auxiliary relay has its special function Please don t use undefined auxiliary relay ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 22 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 4 5 The Function of Timer The unit of timer is ims 10ms and 100ms The count method is count up The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings The setting is K in decimal number Data register D can be also used as settings The real setting time of timer unit of timer settings ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 23 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function C 4 6 The Features and Functions of Counter Features Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up down Settings 0 32 767 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Designate for constant Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D 2 for designated Present value change Counter will stop when attaining settings Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings Output contact When count attains settings contact will be On and latched When count up attains settings contact will be On and latched When count down attains settings contact will reset to Off Reset action The present value will reset to will reset to Off 0 when RST command is executed and contact Present register 16 bits 32 b
291. wing equation to calculate the rated slip Rated Slip Hz Fbase Pr 01 01 base frequency rated rpm x motor pole 120 Slip Compensation Limit Unit 1 Settings 0 to 250 Factory Setting 200 E This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency the percentage of Pr 07 06 Example when Pr 07 06 5Hz and Pr 07 07 150 the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7 5Hz Therefore for a 50Hz motor the max output is 57 5Hz 07 08 Torque Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 01 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 10 07 09 Slip Compensation Time Constant Unit 0 01 Settings 0 05 10 00 sec Factory Setting 0 20 En Setting Pr 07 08 and Pr 07 09 changes the response time for the compensations Too long time constants give slow response too short values can give unstable operation 07 10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Min Unit 1 Settings 0 1439 Factory Setting 0 Accumulative Motor Operation Time Day Unit 1 Settings 0 65535 Factory Setting 0 E Pr 07 10 and Pr 07 11 are used to record the motor operation time They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded 0712 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Unit 1 Factory Setting 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Enable 07 14 Motor Overheat Protection Level Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 10 0V Factory Setting 2 4 E When the motor is running at low f
292. y 2 Attained 0 00 to 600 0Hz ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Group 4 Input Function Parameters Factory Keypad P m0400 Potentiometer Bias moto 100 03 Keypad 0 Positive bias 04 01 Potentiometer Bias 1 Negative bias Polarity Keypad 9 04 02 Potentiometer Gain 0 1 to 200 0 100 0 Keypad Potentiometer 0 No negative bias command 04 03 Negative Bias Reverse Motion SEN Enable Disable Negative bias REV motion enabled 04 04 2 wire 3 wire 2 wire FWD STOP REV STOP Operation Control Modes 2 wire FWD REV RUN STOP 3 wire operation Multi Step speed command 3 Multi Step speed command 4 External reset Accel Decel inhibit Accel Decel time selection command 04 05 Multi function Input No function 1 Terminal MI3 Multi Step speed command 1 Multi Step speed command 2 wa 04 06 Multi function Input Terminal MI4 04 07 Multi function Input Terminal MI5 Multi function Input Terminal MI6 Jog Operation oO O OC A N External base block 10 Up Increment master frequency 11 Down Decrement master frequency 12 Counter Trigger Signal 13 Counter reset 14 E F External Fault Input 15 PID function disabled 4 12 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 Chapter 4 Parameters Factory 6 Output shutoff stop 17 Parameter lock enable 18 Operation command selection external terminals 19 Operation comm
293. y 4 MO1 MOA are used in PLC program they cannot be used in other places For example When YO in PLC program is activated the corresponding output terminals Relay RA RB RC will be used At this moment parameter 03 00 setting will be invalid Because the terminal has been used by PLC gt The PLC corresponding input points for to MI6 are to X5 When extension card are added the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter C 2 2 C 2 2 Device Reference Table Device ID 0 1 2 S 4 5 6 7 10 Terminals of AC Drives 3IN 3OUT Card EME D33A 2 MIA MIS 6 MI7 MI8 MI9 ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 3 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Device ID 0 1 Terminals of AC RY MO1 Drives Relay Card 2C RY2 RY3 B EME DR2CA Relay Card 3A EME R3AA RY2 RY3 RY4 SIN 3OUT Card EME D33A Es MO2 MO3 MO4 C 2 3 Soft PLC ADV50 Installation Download PLC program to AC drive Refer to C 3 to C 7 for writing program and download the editor Soft PLC ADV50 V2 09 at GEFRAN website http www gefran com N lt Hea x EBnumce p See ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 anon C How to Use PLC Function hp 4
294. ys be ON 5 M1028 it is used to enable ON disable OFF the high speed counter function M1029 it is used to clear the high speed counter M1018 it is used to start high speed counter function when M1028 is ON 6 D1025 the low word of high speed counter C235 D1026 the high word of high speed counter C235 M100 OV D1044 M101 OV D1044 M102 OV D1044 M102 MO M1018 4 DHSCS H10050 C235 M1 M1018 M2 M3 M10 M 5 1 API Mnemonic Operands Function 139 RPR P 1 2 Read the AC motor drive s parameters ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 C 60 Appendix C How to Use PLC Function Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps op X Y M K H KnY KnM T D RPRP 5 steps 1 S2 51 Data address for reading 52 Register that saves the read data API Mnemonic Operands Function 140 WPR 1 2 Write the AC motor drive s parameters Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps OF X LY M IK H KnY T C D WPR WPRP 5 steps 1 S2 Operands S1 Data address for writing S2 Register that saves the written data Program Example 1 Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the ADV50 into DO and H2101 into D1 When MO ON it wil
295. z Factory Setting 0 00 E This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr 10 00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz PID Offset Level Unit 0 1 Settings 1 0 to 50 0 Factory Setting 10 0 EXE Detection Time of PID Offset Unit 0 1 Settings 0 1 to 300 0 sec Factory Setting 5 0 E This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback En When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr 10 12 for a time exceeding the setting of Pr 10 13 the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr 03 00 Pr 03 01 is set to 16 Sleep Wake Up Detection Time Unit 0 1 Settings 0 0 to 6550 sec Factory Setting 0 0 EXE Sleep Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 EXE Wakeup Frequency Unit 0 01 Settings 0 00 to 600 0 Hz Factory Setting 0 00 C3 When the actual output frequency lt Pr 10 15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode When the actual frequency command gt Pr 10 16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr 10 14 the AC motor drive will restart ADV50 SW PW V1 11 CTL V2 11 4 135 Chapter 4 Parameters When the AC motor drive is sleep mode frequency is still calculated by PID When frequency reaches wake up frequency AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr 01 05 minimum frequency following the V f curve The wake up frequency must higher than sleep fre

ADV50, User Manual (sw V1.11)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents